Перевод: со всех языков на все языки

со всех языков на все языки

(with adjectives)

Толкование Перевод

1 Comparative degree: adjectives

Сравнительная степень сравнения прилагательных

↑ Degrees of comparison: adjectives

1) Сравнительная степень прилагательных в английском языке может образовываться синтетически (прибавлением суффикса -er) или аналитически (с помощью конструкции со словом more).

а) Синтетически образуют сравнительную степень односложные прилагательные (кроме right и wrong), а также часть двусложных прилагательных: все оканчивающиеся на -y, а также прилагательные clever, narrow, quiet, simple

fat (жирный) — fatter (жирнее)

easy (легкий) — easier (легче)

б) Многие двусложные прилагательные могут образовывать сравнительную степень как синтетически, так и аналитически

common (распространенный) — commoner/more common (более распространенный)

polite (вежливый) — politer/more polite (вежливее)

в) Только аналитически образуют сравнительную степень некоторые двусложные прилагательные (в частности, все оканчивающиеся на -ing, -ed, -ful и - less), а также прилагательные, состоящие из трех или более слогов.

В случае сомнений способ образования сравнительной степени двусложных прилагательных следует устанавливать по словарю.

But what is more striking... — Но более поразительно то, что...

But the British people have a far more reserved nature than Australians. — Но по сравнению с австралийцами, британцы гораздо сдержаннее по характеру.

He grew more cheerful. — Он приободрился.

And now that I'm more helpless than ever, you're going away! — И теперь, когда я так беспомощен, ты уходишь.

Family and friends are more important than money. — Семья и друзья важнее денег.

г) Некоторые прилагательные образуют сравнительную степень нерегулярно или имеют несколько сравнительных форм:

good (хороший) — better (лучше)

bad (плохой) — worse (хуже)

far (дальний) — farther (более удаленный)/further (дополнительный)

old (старый) — older (более старый)/elder (старший)

д) Нерегулярно образуют сравнительную форму следующие местоимения-прилагательные.

much/many (много) — more (больше)

little (мало) — less (меньше)

2) Синтетическая форма сравнительной степени не используется, если сравниваются две возможные характеристики одного и того же предмета

She is more nice than wise — Она скорее мила, чем умна

3) Для обозначения убывающей степени проявления качества вместо местоимения more используется местоимение less

less important — менее важный

4) Прилагательное в сравнительной степени может иметь при себе уточняющие слова much, many (перед more + сущ. во мн.ч.), far, a lot, lots - гораздо, намного, any - сколько-нибудь, no - нисколько не, rather - довольно, a little, a bit - немного, even, all the - еще, any the - еще сколько-нибудь, none the - еще ничуть не. Слова any, no, a bit и a lot, как правило, не используются при прилагательных в сравнительной степени, имеющих при себе существительные

He's got many more problems these days than ever — У него сейчас гораздо больше проблем, чем когда-либо раньше

Do you feel any better? — Вам сколько-нибудь лучше?

This car is a bit more expensive. — Эта машина стоит немного дороже.

Again she had a scene of remonstrance with Tom, all the more severe, in proportion to the greater strength of her present position — Она снова устроила Тому скандал. На этот раз она протестовала еще сильнее, так как позиции ее упрочились.

English-Russian grammar dictionary > Comparative degree: adjectives
2 deal with

1) (to be concerned with: This book deals with methods of teaching English.) behandeln

2) (to take action about, especially in order to solve a problem, get rid of a person, complete a piece of business etc: She deals with all the inquiries.) erledigen

* * *

◆ deal with

vi

▪ to \deal with with sb/sth

1. (handle) sich akk mit jdm/etw befassen

I'll \deal with with the car insurance ich kümmere mich um die Autoversicherung

2. (discuss, treat) von jdm/etw handeln

3. (do business) mit jdm/etw Geschäfte machen

* * *

vi +prep obj

1) (= do business with) verhandeln mit

2) (= manage, handle) sich kümmern um; job sich befassen mit; emotions umgehen mit; (successfully) fertig werden mit; (COMM) orders erledigen; (= be responsible for) zuständig sein für

let's deal with the adjectives first —

to know how to deal with sb — wissen, wie man mit jdm fertig wird or mit jdm umgeht

you bad boy, I'll deal with you later (inf) — dich knöpf or nehm ich mir später vor, du Lausebengel!

the problem has been successfully dealt with — man ist gut mit dem Problem fertig geworden

if we don't deal with the problem soon — wenn wir uns nicht bald mit dem Problem befassen

to deal with a case (judge) — einen Fall verhandeln; (lawyer) sich mit einem Fall befassen

3) (= be concerned with book, film etc) handeln von; (author) sich beschäftigen or befassen mit

* * *

v.

besorgen v.

erledigen v.

fertigwerden mit v.

handeln von (Film, Buch) v.

sich befassen mit v.

zu tun haben mit ausdr.

English-german dictionary > deal with
3 œsi-

with adjectives and nouns, violently, very (œsimikill, œsihvatlig).

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > œsi-
4 the

[ forma debole davanti a vocale ðɪ] [ davanti a consonante ðə, forma forte ðiː]
determinante

1) (specifying, identifying etc.) il, lo, la, i, gli, le

two chapters of the book — due capitoli del libro

I met him at the supermarket — l'ho incontrato al supermercato

2) (best etc.)

the French restaurant — il ristorante francese per eccellenza

the way of losing weight — il modo più efficace per perdere peso

3) (with family names)

the Buntings — i Bunting, la famiglia Bunting

4) (with genre)

the ballet — il balletto

5) (with era)

the fifties — gli anni cinquanta

6) (with adjectives)

the impossible — l'impossibile

7) (with adjectives forming group)

the French — i francesi

the dead — i morti

8) (with comparative adjectives)

the news made her all the sadder — la notizia la rese ancora più triste

9) (in double comparatives)

the more I learn the less I understand — più studio meno capisco

the sooner the better — prima è meglio è

10) (with superlatives)

the fastest train — il treno più veloce

the prettiest house in the village — la casa più carina del paese

* * *
[ðə, ði]
adjective

(The form [ðə] is used before words beginning with a consonant eg the house or consonant sound eg the union [ðə'ju:njən]; the form [ði] is used before words beginning with a vowel eg the apple or vowel sound eg the honour [ði 'onə]) il, lo, la, i, gli, le

1) (used to refer to a person, thing etc mentioned previously, described in a following phrase, or already known: Where is the book I put on the table?; Who was the man you were talking to?; My mug is the tall blue one; Switch the light off!) il, lo, la

2) (used with a singular noun or an adjective to refer to all members of a group etc or to a general type of object, group of objects etc: The horse is running fast.; I spoke to him on the telephone; He plays the piano/violin very well.) il, lo, la

3) (used to refer to unique objects etc, especially in titles and names: the Duke of Edinburgh; the Atlantic (Ocean).)

4) (used after a preposition with words referring to a unit of quantity, time etc: In this job we are paid by the hour.) il, lo, la

5) (used with superlative adjectives and adverbs to denote a person, thing etc which is or shows more of something than any other: He is the kindest man I know; We like him (the) best of all.)

6) ((often with all) used with comparative adjectives to show that a person, thing etc is better, worse etc: He has had a week's holiday and looks (all) the better for it.)

•

- the...
- the...
* * *
[ forma debole davanti a vocale ðɪ] [ davanti a consonante ðə, forma forte ðiː]
determinante

1) (specifying, identifying etc.) il, lo, la, i, gli, le

two chapters of the book — due capitoli del libro

I met him at the supermarket — l'ho incontrato al supermercato

2) (best etc.)

the French restaurant — il ristorante francese per eccellenza

the way of losing weight — il modo più efficace per perdere peso

3) (with family names)

the Buntings — i Bunting, la famiglia Bunting

4) (with genre)

the ballet — il balletto

5) (with era)

the fifties — gli anni cinquanta

6) (with adjectives)

the impossible — l'impossibile

7) (with adjectives forming group)

the French — i francesi

the dead — i morti

8) (with comparative adjectives)

the news made her all the sadder — la notizia la rese ancora più triste

9) (in double comparatives)

the more I learn the less I understand — più studio meno capisco

the sooner the better — prima è meglio è

10) (with superlatives)

the fastest train — il treno più veloce

the prettiest house in the village — la casa più carina del paese

English-Italian dictionary > the
5 be

'bi: ɡi:
( abbreviation) (Bachelor of Engineering; first degree in Engineering.) licenciatura en Ingeniería

be vb

1. ser

Michael is very tall Michael es muy alto

Lisbon is the capital of Portugal Lisboa es la capital de Portugal

sugar is sweet el azúcar es dulce

Napoleon was Corsican Napoleón era corso

my father is an architect mi padre es arquitecto

my mother is from Bristol mi madre es de Bristol

what time is it? It's 3 o'clock ¿qué hora es? Son las tres

June 17th is Elena's birthday el 17 de junio es el cumpleaños de Elena

who is it? It's me ¿quién es? Soy yo

this exercise is difficult este ejercicio es difícil

the house was built 50 years ago la casa fue construida hace 50 años

he was attacked by a dog le atacó un perro

2. estar

how are you? I'm fine ¿cómo estás? estoy bien

David is very happy David está muy contento

I'm tired estoy cansado

his wife's pregnant su mujer está embarazada

we were worried about you estábamos preocupados por ti

where is Pauline? ¿dónde está Pauline?

the milk is on the table la leche está en la mesa

how far is it? ¿a qué distancia está?

what day is it today? ¿qué día es hoy? / ¿a qué día estamos?

3. tener

how old are you? I'm 16 ¿cuántos años tienes? tengo 16 años

I'm cold tengo frío

she's hungry tiene hambre

you're right tienes razón

4. costar / valer / ser

how much is it? ¿cuánto cuesta? / ¿cuánto vale? / ¿cuánto es?

the tickets are £15 each las entradas valen 15 libras cada una

5. hacer

it's sunny hace sol

it's hot hace calor

it was cold hacía frío

6. haber

there are a lot of people hay mucha gente

how many children are there? ¿cuántos niños hay?

there was an explosion hubo una explosión

El pasado de be es was o were y el participio pasado es been; el gerundio se escribe being

Se usa también para construir el tiempo verbal llamado present continuous que indica una acción que está pasando en estos momentos

what are you doing? ¿qué estás haciendo? / ¿qué haces?

I'm reading a magazine estoy leyendo una revista

look, it's snowing mira, está nevando

be sustantivo femenino: name of the letter b, often called be largaor grande to distinguish it from v 'be' also found in these entries: Spanish: A - abasto - abate - abismo - abotargarse - abreviar - abrirse - absoluta - absoluto - abultar - abundar - aburrir - aburrirse - acabose - acariciar - acaso - acertar - achantarse - acometer - acostada - acostado - acostumbrar - acostumbrada - acostumbrado - acreditar - activa - activo - adelantar - adelantarse - adentro - adivinarse - admirarse - adolecer - aferrarse - afianzarse - aficionada - aficionado - afligirse - agonizar - agotarse - agradecer - agua - ahogarse - ahora - aire - ajo - ala - alarmarse - alcanzar - alegrarse English: aback - abate - about - absent - accordance - account for - accountable - accustom - acquaint - action - addicted - address - adequate - adjust - admit - affiliated - afford - afraid - agenda - agree - agreement - ahead - air - airsick - alert - alive - alone - along - aloof - alphabetically - always - am - ambition - amenable - amusing - anathema - annoyance - anomaly - anxious - apologetic - appal - appall - are - arm - around - arrears - as - ashamed - aspire - assert

be

tr[biː]

intransitive verb (pres 1ª pers am, 2ª pers sing y todas del pl are, 3ª pers sing is; pt 1ª y 3ª pers sing was, 2ª pers sing y todas del pl; pp been)

1 (permanent characteristic) ser

■ she's clever es inteligente

■ he's blind es ciego

■ I'm deaf soy sordo

2 (essential quality) ser

■ diamonds are hard los diamantes son duros

3 (nationality) ser

■ John's English John es inglés

■ they are Japanese son japoneses

4 (occupation) ser

■ he's an engineer es ingeniero

■ we are both teachers los dos somos profesores

5 (origin) ser

■ they are from York son de York

6 (ownership) ser

■ it's my pencil es mi lápiz

7 (authorship) ser

■ this painting is by Botero este cuadro es de Botero

8 (composition) ser

■ this cupboard is oak este armario es de roble

9 (use) ser

■ this product is for tiles este producto es para baldosas

10 (location) estar

■ Whitby is on the coast Whitby está en la costa

11 (temporary state) estar

■ your supper's cold tu cena está fría

■ how are you? ¿cómo estás?

■ you're a bit deaf today estás un poco sordo hoy

■ prawns are cheap today las gambas están bien de precio hoy

12 (age) tener

■ Philip is 22 Philip tiene 22 años

13 (price) costar, valer

■ a single ticket is £9.50 un billete de ida cuesta £9.50

14 tener

■ he's hot/cold tiene calor/frío

■ we're hungry/thirsty tenemos hambre/sed

■ she's in a hurry tiene prisa

■ he's right tiene razón

auxiliar be + pres part

1 (action in progress or near future) estar

■ it is raining está lloviendo

■ he's working está trabajando

■ the train is coming viene el tren

■ I am going on Thursday iré el jueves

■ she's meeting Mr Broddle tomorrow se reunirá con el señor Broddle mañana

auxiliar to be + past participle

1 (passive) ser

■ she was arrested at the border fue detenida en la frontera, la detuvieron en la frontera

■ he's hated by everybody es odiado por todos, todos lo odian

■ he was discharged fue dado de alta, lo dieron de alta

■ the house has been sold la casa ha sido vendida, la casa se ha vendido, han vendido la casa

■ he was given a clock le dieron un reloj

■ thirty children were injured treinta niños fueron heridos, treinta niños resultaron heridos

■ the two areas of the town are divided by a wall las dos zonas de la ciudad están divididas por un muro

auxiliar be + to + inf

1 (obligation) deber, tener que

■ you are not to come here again no debes volver aquí

■ you are to do as I say tienes que hacer lo que yo te diga

1 (future)

■ the King is to visit Egypt el Rey visitará Egipto

phrase there is / there are

1 hay

■ there's some wine in the bottle hay algo de vino en la botella

■ there are two policemen following us hay dos policías que nos siguen

■ is there much traffic ¿hay mucho tráfico?

1 había

■ there was no money no había dinero

■ there were twenty five candles on the cake había veinticinco velas en la tarta

■ were there many people? ¿había mucha gente?

phrase there will be

1 habrá

■ there will be snow in the mountains habrá nieve en las montañas

phrase there would be

1 habría

■ there would be time to see the castle habría tiempo para ver el castillo

■ if Mike came, there would be ten of us si viniera Mike, seríamos diez

\

SMALLIDIOMATIC EXPRESSION/SMALL

to be about to «+ inf» estar para + inf, estar a punto de + inf

■ the train is about to arrive el tren está a punto de llegar

to be or not to be ser o no ser

be ['bi:] v, was ['wəz, 'wɑz] ; were ['wər] ; been ['bɪn] ; being ; am ['æm] ; is ['ɪz] ; are ['ɑr] vi

1) (expressing equality) : ser

José is a doctor: José es doctor

I'm Ana's sister: soy la hermana de Ana

2) (expressing quality) : ser

the tree is tall: el árbol es alto

you're silly!: ¡eres tonto!

3) (expressing origin or possession) : ser

she's from Managua: es de Managua

it's mine: es mío

4) (expressing location) : estar

my mother is at home: mi madre está en casa

the cups are on the table: las tazas están en la mesa

5) (expressing existence) : ser, existir

to be or not to be: ser, o no ser

I think, therefore I am: pienso, luego existo

6) (expressing a state of being) : estar, tener

how are you?: ¿cómo estás?

I'm cold: tengo frío

she's 10 years old: tiene 10 años

they're both sick: están enfermos los dos

be v impers

1) (indicating time) : ser

it's eight o'clock: son las ocho

it's Friday: hoy es viernes

2) (indicating a condition) : hacer, estar

it's sunny: hace sol

it's very dark outside: está bien oscuro afuera

be v aux

1) (expressing progression) : estar

what are you doing? -I'm working: ¿qué haces? -estoy trabajando

2) (expressing occurrence) : ser

it was finished yesterday: fue acabado ayer, se acabó ayer

it was cooked in the oven: se cocinó en el horno

3) (expressing possibility) : poderse

can she be trusted?: ¿se puede confiar en ella?

4) (expressing obligation) : deber

you are to stay here: debes quedarte aquí

he was to come yesterday: se esperaba que viniese ayer

be

v.

(§ p.,p.p.: was, were, been) = estar v.

(§pres: estoy, estás...) pret: estuv-•)

• ser v.

(§pres: soy, eres, es, somos, sois, son) subj: se-

imp: er-

pret

fu-•)

biːˌ weak form bi
1.

1) (pres am, are, is; past was, were; past p been) intransitive verb [See notes at ser and estar]

Sense I

2)

a) (followed by an adjective)

she's French/intelligent — es francesa/inteligente

he's worried/furious — está preocupado/furioso

he's blind — es or (Esp tb) está ciego

he's short and fat — es bajo y gordo

he's so fat he can't get into his clothes any more — está tan gordo que ya no le cabe la ropa

these shoes are new — estos zapatos son nuevos

have you never had gazpacho? it's delicious! — ¿nunca has comido gazpacho? es delicioso!

the gazpacho is delicious, did you make it yourself? — el gazpacho está delicioso ¿lo hiciste tú?

she was very rude to me — estuvo or fue muy grosera conmigo

she's very rude — es muy grosera

be good — sé bueno

don't be silly! — no seas tonto!

b) ( talking about marital status)

Tony is married/divorced/single — Tony está or (esp AmL) es casado/divorciado/soltero

to be married to somebody — estar* casado con alguien

we've been married for eight years — llevamos ocho años casados

3)

a) (followed by a noun) ser*

she's a lawyer — es abogada

he's a Catholic — es católico

she was Prime Minister for 11 years — fue Primera Ministra durante 11 años

who was Prime Minister at the time? — ¿quién era Primer Ministro en ese momento?

it's me/Daniel — soy yo/es Daniel

if I were you, I'd stay — yo que tú or yo en tu lugar me quedaría

b) ( play the role of) hacer* de

I was Juliet in the school play — hice de Julieta en la obra del colegio

4)

a) ( talking about mental and physical states)

how are you? — ¿cómo estás?

I'm much better — estoy or me encuentro mucho mejor

she's pregnant/tired — está embarazada/cansada

I'm cold/hot/hungry/thirsty/sleepy — tengo frío/calor/hambre/sed/sueño

she has been ill — ha estado enferma

he's dead — está muerto

b) ( talking about age) tener*

how old are you? — ¿cuántos años tienes?

I'm 31 — tengo 31 años

Paul was four last Monday — Paul cumplió cuatro años el lunes pasado

he's a lot older/younger — es mucho mayor/menor

our house is over 100 years old — nuestra casa tiene más de 100 años

c) (giving cost, measurement, weight)

how much is that? - that'll be $15, please — ¿cuánto es? - (son) 15 dólares, por favor

they are $15 each — cuestan or valen 15 dólares cada una

two plus two is four — dos más dos son cuatro

how tall/heavy is he? — ¿cuánto mide/pesa?

Jim's over six feet (tall) — Jim mide más de seis pies

Sense II

5)

a) (exist, live)

I think, therefore I am — pienso, luego existo

to be or not to be — ser o no ser

to let something/somebody be — dejar tranquilo or en paz algo/a alguien

her husband-to-be — su futuro marido

b) ( in expressions of time)

don't be too long — no tardes mucho, no (te) demores mucho (esp AmL)

I'm drying my hair, I won't be long — me estoy secando el pelo, enseguida estoy

how long will dinner be? — ¿cuánto falta para la cena?

c) ( take place) ser*

the party is tomorrow — la fiesta es mañana

6) (be situated, present) estar*

where is the library? — ¿dónde está or queda la biblioteca?

where are you? — ¿dónde estás?

what's in that box? — ¿qué hay en esa caja?

who's in the movie? — ¿quién actúa or trabaja en la película?

he's here for two weeks — va a estar aquí dos semanas

how long are you in Chicago (for)? — (colloq) ¿cuánto (tiempo) te vas a quedar en Chicago ?

7) (only in perfect tenses) ( visit) estar*

I've never been to India — nunca he estado en la India

have you been to the exhibition yet? — ¿ya has estado en or has ido a la exposición?

2.

v impers

1)

a) (talking about physical conditions, circumstances)

it's sunny/cold/hot — hace sol/frío/calor

it's cloudy — está nublado

it was three degrees below zero — hacía tres grados bajo cero

it's so noisy/quiet in here! — qué ruido/silencio hay aquí!

I have enough problems as it is, without you... — yo ya tengo suficientes problemas sin que tú encima...

b) ( in expressions of time) ser*

it's three o'clock — son las tres

it's one o'clock — es la una

it was still very early — todavía era muy temprano

it's Wednesday today — hoy es miércoles

hi, Joe, it's been a long time — qué tal, Joe, tanto tiempo (sin verte)

c) ( talking about distance) estar*

it's 500 miles from here to Detroit — Detroit queda or está a 500 millas de aquí

2)

a) (introducing person, object) ser*

it was me who told them — fui yo quien se lo dije or dijo, fui yo el que se lo dije or dijo

b) (in conditional use) ser*

if it hadn't been o had it not been for Juan, we would have been killed — si no hubiera sido por Juan or de no ser por Juan, nos habríamos matado

3.

v aux

1) to be -ing

a) ( used to describe action in progress) estar* + ger

what was I saying? — ¿qué estaba diciendo?

she was leaving when... — se iba cuando...

how long have you been waiting? — ¿cuánto (tiempo) hace que esperas?, ¿cuánto (tiempo) llevas esperando?

b) ( with future reference)

he is o will be arriving tomorrow — llega mañana

when are you seeing her? — ¿cuándo la vas a ver or la verás?

she'll be staying at the Plaza — se va a alojar en el Plaza

2) (in the passive voice) ser* [The passive voice, however, is less common in Spanish than it is in English]

it was built in 1903 — fue construido en 1903, se construyó en 1903, lo construyeron en 1903

she was told that... — le dijeron or se le dijo que...

it is known that... — se sabe que...

3) to be to + inf

a) ( with future reference)

I'm to be met at the airport by Joe — Joe me irá a buscar al aeropuerto

the dessert is (still) to come — todavía falta el postre

if a solution is to be found... — si se quiere encontrar or si se ha de encontrar una solución...

b) ( expressing possibility)

what are we to do? — ¿qué podemos hacer?

he wasn't to know — no tenía cómo saberlo

it was nowhere to be found — no se lo pudo encontrar por ninguna parte

c) ( expressing obligation) deber* + inf, tener* que + inf, haber* de + inf

tell her she's to stay here — dile que debe quedarse or tiene que quedarse aquí, dile que se quede aquí

you are not to tell Carol! — no debes decírselo a Carol!

am I to understand that... ? — ¿debo entender que... ?

I'm not to be disturbed! — que nadie me moleste!

4) ( in hypotheses)

what would happen if she were o was to die? — ¿qué pasaría si ella muriera?

5)

a) (in tag questions)

she's right, isn't she? — tiene razón, ¿no? or ¿verdad? or ¿no es cierto?

so that's what you think, is it? — de manera que eso es lo que piensas

b) (in elliptical uses)

are you disappointed? - yes, I am/no, I'm not — ¿estás desilusionado? - sí (, lo estoy)/no (, no lo estoy)

she was told the news, and so was he/but I wasn't — a ella le dieron la noticia, y también a él/pero a mí no

I'm surprised, are/aren't you? — estoy sorprendido, ¿y tú?/¿tú no?

[biː] (present am, is or are pt was or were pp been)
1. INTRANSITIVE VERB

1) (linking nouns, noun phrases, pronouns) ser

he's a pianist — es pianista

he wants to be a doctor — quiere ser médico

Monday's a holiday — el lunes es fiesta

two and two are four — dos y dos son cuatro

it's me! — ¡soy yo!

it was me — fui yo

who wants to be Hamlet? — ¿quién quiere hacer de or ser Hamlet?

you be the patient and I'll be the doctor — tú eres el enfermo y yo seré el médico

if I were you... — yo en tu lugar..., yo que tú... *

2) (possession) ser

she's his sister — es su hermana

it's mine — es mío

3) (characteristics seen as inherent) ser

the sky is blue — el cielo es azul

it's (made of) plastic — es de plástico

they're English — son ingleses

he's tall — es alto

it's round/enormous — es redondo/enorme

she is boring — es aburrida

I used to be poor but now I'm rich — antes era pobre pero ahora soy rico

if I were rich — si fuera rico

I'm from the south — soy del sur

the book is in French — el libro es en francés
Use [estar] with past participles used as adjectives describing the results of an action or process:
it's broken — está roto

he's dead — está muerto

4) (changeable or temporary state) estar

it's dirty — está sucio

she's bored/ill — está aburrida/enferma

how are you? — ¿cómo estás?, ¿qué tal estás?

how are you now? — ¿qué tal te encuentras ahora?

I'm very well, thanks — estoy muy bien, gracias
In certain expressions where English uses [be] + adjective to describe feelings ([be cold]/[hot]/[hungry]/[thirsty]), Spanish uses [tener] with a noun:
I'm cold/hot — tengo frío/calor

my feet are cold — tengo los pies fríos

I'm hungry/thirsty — tengo hambre/sed

be good! — ¡pórtate bien!

you're late — llegas tarde
afraid, sleepy, right
5) (age)

"how old is she?" - "she's nine" — -¿cuántos años tiene? -tiene nueve años

she will be two tomorrow — mañana cumple dos años

when I'm old — cuando sea viejo

when I was young — cuando era joven

6) (=take place) ser

the meeting's today — la reunión es hoy

the service will be at St Ninian's Church — el oficio será en la iglesia de San Ninian

7) (=be situated) estar

Edinburgh is in Scotland — Edimburgo está en Escocia

it's on the table — está sobre or en la mesa

where is the Town Hall? — ¿dónde está or queda el ayuntamiento?

it's 5 km to the village — el pueblo está or queda a 5 kilómetros

he won't be here tomorrow — mañana no estará aquí

we've been here for ages — hace mucho tiempo que estamos aquí, llevamos aquí mucho tiempo, estamos aquí desde hace mucho tiempo

• here you are(, take it) — aquí tienes(, tómalo)

• there's the church — ahí está la iglesia

8) (impersonal use)

a) (referring to weather) hacer

it's hot/cold — hace calor/frío

it's too hot — hace demasiado calor

it's fine — hace buen tiempo

b) (referring to time, date etc) ser

it's eight o'clock — son las ocho

it's morning in New York now — en Nueva York ahora es por la mañana

wake up, it's morning — despierta, es de día

what's the date (today)? — ¿qué fecha es hoy?

it's 3 May or the 3rd of May — es 3 de mayo

it's Thursday today — hoy es jueves
But note the following alternatives with [estar]:
it's 3 May or the 3rd of May — estamos a 3 de mayo

it's Thursday today — hoy estamos a jueves

c) (asking and giving opinion) ser

is it certain that...? — ¿es verdad or cierto que...?

it is easy to make a mistake — es fácil cometer un fallo

is it fair that she should be punished while...? — ¿es justo que se la castigue mientras que...?

it is possible that he'll come — es posible que venga, puede (ser) que venga

it is impossible to study all the time — es imposible estar siempre estudiando

it is unbelievable that... — es increíble que...

it's not clear whether... — no está claro si...

it would be wrong for us to do that — no estaría bien que nosotros hiciésemos eso

d) (emphatic) ser

it's me who does all the work — soy yo quien hace todo el trabajo

it was Peter who phoned — fue Peter quien llamó

why is it that she's so successful? — ¿cómo es que tiene tanto éxito?, ¿por qué tiene tanto éxito?

it was then that... — fue entonces cuando...

9) (=exist) haber

there is/are — hay

what is (there) in that room? — ¿qué hay en esa habitación?

there is nothing more beautiful — no hay nada más bello

is there anyone at home? — ¿hay alguien en casa?

there were six road accidents here last year — el año pasado hubo seis accidentes de tráfico aquí

there must be an explanation — debe de haber una explicación

there being no alternative solution... — al no haber or no habiendo otra solución...

let there be light! — ¡hágase la luz!

there are three of us — somos tres

there were three of them — eran tres

after the shop there's the bus station — después de la tienda está la estación de autobuses

See:

THERE IS, THERE ARE in there

10) (=cost)

how much was it? — ¿cuánto costó?

the book is £20 — el libro vale or cuesta 20 libras

how much is it? — ¿cuánto es?; (when paying) ¿qué le debo? frm

11) (=visit)

has the postman been? — ¿ha venido el cartero?

he has been and gone — vino y se fue

I have been to see my aunt — he ido a ver a mi tía

have you ever been to Glasgow? — ¿has estado en Glasgow alguna vez?

I've been to China — he estado en China

12) (in noun compounds) futuro

• mother to be — futura madre or mamá f

• my wife to be — mi futura esposa

13) (in set expressions)

to be or not to be — ser o no ser

• been and * —

you've been and done it now! — ¡buena la has hecho! *

that dog of yours has been and dug up my flowers! — ¡tu perro ha ido y me ha destrozado las flores!

• you're busy enough as it is — estás bastante ocupado ya con lo que tienes, ya tienes suficiente trabajo

as things are — tal como están las cosas

be that as it may — sea como fuere

• if it hadn't been for..., if it hadn't been for you or frm had it not been for you, we would have lost — si no hubiera sido por ti or de no haber sido por ti, habríamos perdido

• let me be! — ¡déjame en paz!

• if that's what you want to do, then so be it — si eso es lo que quieres hacer, adelante

• what is it to you? * — ¿a ti qué te importa?

• what's it to be? — (in bar etc) ¿qué va a ser?, ¿qué vas a tomar?

2. AUXILIARY VERB

1) (forming passive) ser

the house was destroyed by an earthquake — la casa fue destruida por un terremoto
The passive is not used as often in Spanish as in English, active and reflexive constructions often being preferred:
the box had been opened — habían abierto la caja

these cars are produced in Spain — estos coches se fabrican en España

it is said that... — dicen que..., se dice que...

he was killed by a terrorist — lo mató un terrorista

she was killed in a car crash — murió en un accidente de coche, resultó muerta en un accidente de coche frm

what's to be done? — ¿qué hay que hacer?

• it's a film not to be missed — es una película que no hay que perderse

• we searched everywhere for him, but he was nowhere to be seen — lo buscamos por todas partes pero no lo encontramos en ningún sitio

2) (forming continuous) estar

it's raining — está lloviendo

what are you doing? — ¿qué estás haciendo?, ¿qué haces?

don't distract me when I'm driving — no me distraigas cuando estoy conduciendo

he's always grumbling — siempre está quejándose

he was studying until the early hours — estuvo estudiando hasta la madrugada
Use the present simple to talk about planned future events and the construction to talk about intention:
they're coming tomorrow — vienen mañana

"it's a pity you aren't coming with us" - "but I am coming!" — -¡qué pena que no vengas con nosotros! -¡sí que voy!

will you be seeing her tomorrow? — ¿la verás or la vas a ver mañana?

will you be needing more? — ¿vas a necesitar más?

I shall be seeing him — voy a verlo

I'll be seeing you — hasta luego, nos vemos (esp LAm)
The imperfect tense can be used for continuous action in the past:
he was driving too fast — conducía demasiado rápido
for, since
3) (verb substitute)

a)

he's older than you are — es mayor que tú

he isn't as happy as he was — no está tan contento como antes

"he's going to complain about you" - "oh, is he?" — -va a quejarse de ti -¿ah, sí?

"I'm worried" - "so am I" — -estoy preocupado -yo también

"I'm not ready" - "neither am I" — -no estoy listo -yo tampoco

"you're tired" - "no, I'm not" — -estás cansado -no, ¡qué va!

"you're not eating enough" - "yes I am" — -no comes lo suficiente -que sí

"they're getting married" - "oh, are they?" — (showing surprise) -se casan -¿ah, sí? or -¡no me digas!

"he isn't very happy" - "oh, isn't he?" — -no está muy contento -¿ah, no?

"he's always late, isn't he?" - "yes, he is" — -siempre llega tarde, ¿verdad? -(pues) sí

"is it what you expected?" - "no, it isn't" — -¿es esto lo que esperabas? -(pues) no

"she's pretty" - "no, she isn't" — -es guapa -¡qué va!

b) (in question tags)

he's handsome, isn't he? — es guapo, ¿verdad?, es guapo, ¿no?, es guapo, ¿no es cierto?

it was fun, wasn't it? — fue divertido, ¿verdad?, fue divertido, ¿no?

she wasn't happy, was she? — no era feliz, ¿verdad?

so he's back again, is he? — así que ha vuelto, ¿eh?

you're not ill, are you? — ¿no estarás enfermo?

3. MODAL VERB
(with infinitive construction)
1) (=must, have to)

you're to put on your shoes — tienes que ponerte los zapatos

he's not to open it — no debe abrirlo, que no lo abra

I am to do it — he de hacerlo yo, soy yo el que debe hacerlo

I am not to speak to him — no tengo permiso para hablar con él

I wasn't to tell you his name — no podía or debía decirte su nombre

2) (=should) deber

he is to be congratulated on his work — debemos felicitarlo por su trabajo

am I to understand that...? — ¿debo entender que...?

she wrote "My Life", not to be confused with Bernstein's book of the same name — escribió "Mi Vida", que no debe confundirse con la obra de Bernstein que lleva el mismo título

he was to have come yesterday — tenía que or debía haber venido ayer

he is to be pitied — es digno de lástima

3) (=will)

the talks are to start tomorrow — las conversaciones darán comienzo mañana

her house is to be sold — su casa se pondrá a la venta

they are to be married in the summer — se casarán en el verano

4) (=can)

these birds are to be found all over the world — estos pájaros se encuentran por todo el mundo

little traffic was to be seen — había poco tráfico

you weren't to know — no tenías por qué saberlo

5) (expressing destiny)

this was to have serious repercussions — esto iba a tener serias repercusiones

they were never to return — jamás regresaron

it was not to be — no quiso el destino que así fuera

6) (in conditional sentences)

you must work harder if you are to succeed — debes esforzarte más si quieres triunfar

if it was or were to snow... — si nevase or nevara...

if I were to leave the job, would you replace me? — si yo dejara el puesto, ¿me sustituirías?
BE
"Ser" or "estar"?
You can use "ser": ► when defining or identifying by linking two nouns or noun phrases:
Paris is the capital of France París es la capital de Francia
He was the most hated man in the village Era el hombre más odiado del pueblo ► to describe essential or inherent characteristics (e.g. colour, material, nationality, race, shape, size {etc}):
His mother is German Su madre es alemana
She was blonde Era rubia ► with most impersonal expressions not involving past participles:
It is important to be on time Es importante llegar a tiempo
Está claro que is an exception:
It is obvious you don't understand Está claro que no lo entiendes ► when telling the time or talking about time or age:
It is ten o'clock Son las diez
It's very late. Let's go home Es muy tarde. Vamos a casa
He lived in the country when he was young Vivió en el campo cuando era joven ► to indicate possession or duty:
It's mine Es mío
This is your responsibility Este asunto es responsabilidad tuya ► with events in the sense of "take place":
The 1992 Olympic Games were in Barcelona Los Juegos Olímpicos de 1992 fueron en Barcelona
"Where is the exam?" - "It's in Room 1" "¿Dónde es el examen?" - "Es en el Aula Número 1" NOTE: Compare this usage with that of estar (see below) to talk about location of places, objects and people.
You can use "estar": ► to talk about location of places, objects and people:
"Where is Zaragoza?" - "It's in Spain" "¿Dónde está Zaragoza?" - "Está en España"
Your glasses are on the bedside table Tus gafas están en la mesilla de noche NOTE: But use ser with events in the sense of "take place" (see above)}. ► to talk about changeable state, condition or mood:
The teacher is ill La profesora está enferma
The coffee's cold El café está frío
How happy I am! ¡Qué contento estoy! NOTE: Feliz, however, which is seen as more permanent than contento, is used mainly with ser. ► to form progressive tenses:
We're having lunch. Is it ok if I call you later? Estamos comiendo. Te llamaré luego, ¿vale?
Both "ser" and "estar" can be used with past participles ► Use ser in {passive} constructions:
This play was written by Lorca Esta obra fue escrita por Lorca
He was shot dead (by a terrorist group) Fue asesinado a tiros (por un grupo terrorista) NOTE: The passive is not used as often in Spanish as it is in English. ► Use estar with past participles to describe the {results} of a previous action or event:
We threw them away because they were broken Los tiramos a la basura porque estaban rotos
He's dead Está muerto ► Compare the use of ser + ((past participle)) which describes {action} and estar + ((past participle)) which describes {result} in the following:
The window was broken by the firemen La ventana fue rota por los bomberos
The window was broken La ventana estaba rota
It was painted around 1925 Fue pintado hacia 1925
The floor is painted a dark colour El suelo está pintado de color oscuro ► Ser and estar are both used in impersonal expressions with past participles. As above, the use of ser implies {action} while the use of estar implies {result}:
It is understood that the work was never finished Es sabido que el trabajo nunca se llegó a terminar
It is a proven fact that vaccinations save many lives Está demostrado que las vacunas salvan muchas vidas
"Ser" and "estar" with adjectives ► Some adjectives can be used with both ser and estar but the meaning changes completely depending on the verb:
He's clever Es listo
Are you ready? ¿Estás listo?
Chemistry is boring La química es aburrida
I'm bored Estoy aburrido ► Other adjectives can also be used with both verbs but the use of ser describes a {characteristic} while the use of estar implies a {change}:
He's very handsome Es muy guapo
You look great in that dress! Estás muy guapa con ese vestido
He's slim Es delgado
You're (looking) very slim ¡Estás muy delgada! For further uses and examples, see main entry
* * *
[biːˌ] weak form [bi]
1.

1) (pres am, are, is; past was, were; past p been) intransitive verb [See notes at ser and estar]

Sense I

2)

a) (followed by an adjective)

she's French/intelligent — es francesa/inteligente

he's worried/furious — está preocupado/furioso

he's blind — es or (Esp tb) está ciego

he's short and fat — es bajo y gordo

he's so fat he can't get into his clothes any more — está tan gordo que ya no le cabe la ropa

these shoes are new — estos zapatos son nuevos

have you never had gazpacho? it's delicious! — ¿nunca has comido gazpacho? es delicioso!

the gazpacho is delicious, did you make it yourself? — el gazpacho está delicioso ¿lo hiciste tú?

she was very rude to me — estuvo or fue muy grosera conmigo

she's very rude — es muy grosera

be good — sé bueno

don't be silly! — no seas tonto!

b) ( talking about marital status)

Tony is married/divorced/single — Tony está or (esp AmL) es casado/divorciado/soltero

to be married to somebody — estar* casado con alguien

we've been married for eight years — llevamos ocho años casados

3)

a) (followed by a noun) ser*

she's a lawyer — es abogada

he's a Catholic — es católico

she was Prime Minister for 11 years — fue Primera Ministra durante 11 años

who was Prime Minister at the time? — ¿quién era Primer Ministro en ese momento?

it's me/Daniel — soy yo/es Daniel

if I were you, I'd stay — yo que tú or yo en tu lugar me quedaría

b) ( play the role of) hacer* de

I was Juliet in the school play — hice de Julieta en la obra del colegio

4)

a) ( talking about mental and physical states)

how are you? — ¿cómo estás?

I'm much better — estoy or me encuentro mucho mejor

she's pregnant/tired — está embarazada/cansada

I'm cold/hot/hungry/thirsty/sleepy — tengo frío/calor/hambre/sed/sueño

she has been ill — ha estado enferma

he's dead — está muerto

b) ( talking about age) tener*

how old are you? — ¿cuántos años tienes?

I'm 31 — tengo 31 años

Paul was four last Monday — Paul cumplió cuatro años el lunes pasado

he's a lot older/younger — es mucho mayor/menor

our house is over 100 years old — nuestra casa tiene más de 100 años

c) (giving cost, measurement, weight)

how much is that? - that'll be $15, please — ¿cuánto es? - (son) 15 dólares, por favor

they are $15 each — cuestan or valen 15 dólares cada una

two plus two is four — dos más dos son cuatro

how tall/heavy is he? — ¿cuánto mide/pesa?

Jim's over six feet (tall) — Jim mide más de seis pies

Sense II

5)

a) (exist, live)

I think, therefore I am — pienso, luego existo

to be or not to be — ser o no ser

to let something/somebody be — dejar tranquilo or en paz algo/a alguien

her husband-to-be — su futuro marido

b) ( in expressions of time)

don't be too long — no tardes mucho, no (te) demores mucho (esp AmL)

I'm drying my hair, I won't be long — me estoy secando el pelo, enseguida estoy

how long will dinner be? — ¿cuánto falta para la cena?

c) ( take place) ser*

the party is tomorrow — la fiesta es mañana

6) (be situated, present) estar*

where is the library? — ¿dónde está or queda la biblioteca?

where are you? — ¿dónde estás?

what's in that box? — ¿qué hay en esa caja?

who's in the movie? — ¿quién actúa or trabaja en la película?

he's here for two weeks — va a estar aquí dos semanas

how long are you in Chicago (for)? — (colloq) ¿cuánto (tiempo) te vas a quedar en Chicago ?

7) (only in perfect tenses) ( visit) estar*

I've never been to India — nunca he estado en la India

have you been to the exhibition yet? — ¿ya has estado en or has ido a la exposición?

2.

v impers

1)

a) (talking about physical conditions, circumstances)

it's sunny/cold/hot — hace sol/frío/calor

it's cloudy — está nublado

it was three degrees below zero — hacía tres grados bajo cero

it's so noisy/quiet in here! — qué ruido/silencio hay aquí!

I have enough problems as it is, without you... — yo ya tengo suficientes problemas sin que tú encima...

b) ( in expressions of time) ser*

it's three o'clock — son las tres

it's one o'clock — es la una

it was still very early — todavía era muy temprano

it's Wednesday today — hoy es miércoles

hi, Joe, it's been a long time — qué tal, Joe, tanto tiempo (sin verte)

c) ( talking about distance) estar*

it's 500 miles from here to Detroit — Detroit queda or está a 500 millas de aquí

2)

a) (introducing person, object) ser*

it was me who told them — fui yo quien se lo dije or dijo, fui yo el que se lo dije or dijo

b) (in conditional use) ser*

if it hadn't been o had it not been for Juan, we would have been killed — si no hubiera sido por Juan or de no ser por Juan, nos habríamos matado

3.

v aux

1) to be -ing

a) ( used to describe action in progress) estar* + ger

what was I saying? — ¿qué estaba diciendo?

she was leaving when... — se iba cuando...

how long have you been waiting? — ¿cuánto (tiempo) hace que esperas?, ¿cuánto (tiempo) llevas esperando?

b) ( with future reference)

he is o will be arriving tomorrow — llega mañana

when are you seeing her? — ¿cuándo la vas a ver or la verás?

she'll be staying at the Plaza — se va a alojar en el Plaza

2) (in the passive voice) ser* [The passive voice, however, is less common in Spanish than it is in English]

it was built in 1903 — fue construido en 1903, se construyó en 1903, lo construyeron en 1903

she was told that... — le dijeron or se le dijo que...

it is known that... — se sabe que...

3) to be to + inf

a) ( with future reference)

I'm to be met at the airport by Joe — Joe me irá a buscar al aeropuerto

the dessert is (still) to come — todavía falta el postre

if a solution is to be found... — si se quiere encontrar or si se ha de encontrar una solución...

b) ( expressing possibility)

what are we to do? — ¿qué podemos hacer?

he wasn't to know — no tenía cómo saberlo

it was nowhere to be found — no se lo pudo encontrar por ninguna parte

c) ( expressing obligation) deber* + inf, tener* que + inf, haber* de + inf

tell her she's to stay here — dile que debe quedarse or tiene que quedarse aquí, dile que se quede aquí

you are not to tell Carol! — no debes decírselo a Carol!

am I to understand that... ? — ¿debo entender que... ?

I'm not to be disturbed! — que nadie me moleste!

4) ( in hypotheses)

what would happen if she were o was to die? — ¿qué pasaría si ella muriera?

5)

a) (in tag questions)

she's right, isn't she? — tiene razón, ¿no? or ¿verdad? or ¿no es cierto?

so that's what you think, is it? — de manera que eso es lo que piensas

b) (in elliptical uses)

are you disappointed? - yes, I am/no, I'm not — ¿estás desilusionado? - sí (, lo estoy)/no (, no lo estoy)

she was told the news, and so was he/but I wasn't — a ella le dieron la noticia, y también a él/pero a mí no

I'm surprised, are/aren't you? — estoy sorprendido, ¿y tú?/¿tú no?

English-spanish dictionary > be
6 AT

I) prep.

A. with dative.

I. Of motion;

1) towards, against;

Otkell laut at Skamkatli, bowed down to S.;

hann sneri egginni at Ásgrími, turned the edge against A.;

2) close atup to;

Brynjólfr gengr alit at honum, quite up to him;

þeir kómust aldri at honum, they could never get near him, to close quarters with him;

3) to, at;

koma at landi, to come to land;

ganga at dómi, to go into court;

4) along (= eptir);

ganga at stræti, to walk along the street;

dreki er niðr fór at ánni (went down the river) fyrir strauminum;

refr dró hörpu at ísi, on the ice;

5) denoting hostility;

renna (sœkja) at e-m, to rush at, assault;

gerði þá at þeim þoku mikla, they were overtaken by a thick fog;

6) around;

vefja motri at höfði sér, to wrap a veil round one’s head;

bera grjót at e-m, to heap stones upon the body;

7) denoting business, engagement;

ríða at hrossum, at sauðum, to go looking after horses, watching sheep;

fara at landskuldum, to go collecting rents.

II. Of position, &c.;

1) denoting presence at, near, by, upon;

at kirkju, at church;

at dómi, in court;

at lögbergi, at the hill of laws;

2) denoting participation in;

vera at veizlu, brullaupi, to be at a banquet, wedding;

vera at vígi, to be an accessory in man-slaying;

3) ellipt., vera at, to be about, to be busy at;

kvalararnir, er at vóru at pína hann, who were tormenting him;

var þar at kona nökkur at binda (was there busy dressing) sár manna;

4) with proper names of places (farms);

konungr at Danmörku ok Noregi, king of;

biskup at Hólum, bishop of Holar;

at Helgafelli, at Bergþórshváli;

5) used ellipt. with a genitive, at (a person’s) house;

at hans (at his house) gisti fjölmenni mikit;

at Marðar, at Mara’s home;

at hins beilaga Ólafs konungs, at St. Olave’s church;

at Ránar, at Ran’s (abode).

III. Of time;

1) at, in;

at upphafi, at first, in the beginning;

at skilnaði, at parting, when they parted;

at páskum, at Easter;

at kveldi, at eventide;

at þinglausnum, at the close of the Assembly;

at fjöru, at the ebb;

at flœðum, at the floodtide;

2) adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr’;

at ári komanda, next year;

at vári, er kemr, next spring;

generally with ‘komanda’ understood;

at sumri, hausti, vetri, vári, next summer, &c.;

3) used with an absolute dative and present or past part.;

at sér lifanda, duing his lifetime;

at öllum ásjándum, in the sight of all;

at áheyranda höfðingjanum, in the hearing of the chief;

at upprennandi sólu, at sunrise;

at liðnum sex vikum, after six weeks are past;

at honum önduðum, after his death;

4) denoting uninterrupted succession, after;

hverr at öðrum, annarr at öðrum, one after another;

skildu menn at þessu, thereupon, after this;

at því (thereafter) kómu aðrar meyjar.

IV. fig. and in various uses;

1) to, into, with the notion of destruction or change;

brenna (borgina) at ösku, to burn to ashes;

verða at ormi, to become a snake;

2) for, as;

gefa e-t at gjöf, as a present;

eiga e-n at vin, to have one as friend;

3) by;

taka sverð at hjöltum, by the hilt;

draga út björninn at hlustunum, by the ears;

kjósa at afli, álitum, by strength, appearrance;

4) as regards as to;

auðigr at fé, wealthy in goods;

vænn (fagr) at áliti, fair of face;

5) as a law term, on the grounds of, by reason of;

ryðja ( to challenge) dóm at mægðum, kvið at frændsemi;

6) as a paraphrase of a genitive;

faðir, móðir at barni (= barns, of a child);

aðili at sök = aðili sakar;

7) with adjectives denoting colour, size, age, of;

hvítr, svartr, rauðr at lit, while, black, red of colour;

mikill, lítill at stœrð, vexti, tall, small of stature;

tvítugr at aldri, twenty years of age;

kýr at fyrsta, öðrum kálfi, a cow that has calved once, twice;

8) determining the source from which anything comes, of, from;

Ari nam ok marga frœði at Þuríði (from her);

þiggja, kaupa, geta, leigja e-t at e-m, to receive, buy, obtain, borrow a thing from one;

hafa veg (virðing) styrk at e-m, to derive honour, power, from one;

9) according, to, after (heygðr at fornum sið);

at ráði allra vitrustu manna, by the advice of;

at landslögum, by the law of the land;

at vánum, as was to be expected;

at leyfi e-s, by one’s leave;

10) in adverbial phrases;

gróa (vera grœddr) at heilu, to be quite healed;

bíta af allt gras at snøggu, quite bare;

at fullu, fully;

at vísu, surely;

at frjálsu, freely;

at eilífu, for ever and ever;

at röngu, at réttu, wrongly, rightly;

at líku, at sömu, equally, all the same;

at mun, at ráði, at marki, to a great extent.

B. with acc., after, upon (= eptir);

sonr á at taka arf at föður sinn, to take the inheritance after his father;

eiga féránsdóm at e-n, to hold a court of execution upon a person;

at þat (= eptir þat), after that, thereafter;

connected with a past part. or a., at Gamla fallinn, after the fall of Gamli;

at Hrungni dauðan, upon the death of Hrungnir.

II)

1) as the simple mark of the infinitive, to;

at ganga, at ríða, at hlaupa, to walk, to ride, to run;

2) in an objective sense;

hann bauð þeim at fara, sitja, he bade (ordered) them to go, sit;

gefa e-m at eta, at drekka, to give one to eat, to drink;

3) denoting design or purpose, in order to (hann gekk í borg at kaupa silfr).

III)

1) demonstrative particle before a comparative, the, all the, so much the;

hón grét at meir, she wept the more;

þykkir oss at líkara, all the more likely;

þú ert maðr at verri (so much the worse), er þú hefir þetta mælt;

2) rel. pron., who, which, that (= er);

þeir allir, at þau tíðindi heyrðu, all those who heard;

sem þeim er títt, at ( as is the custom of those who) kaupferðir reka.

IV)

conj., that;

1) introducing a subjective or objective clause;

þat var einhverju sinni, at Höskuldr hafði vinaboð, it happened once that H.;

vilda ek, at þú réðist austr í fjörðu, I should like you to go;

2) relative to svá, denoting proportion, degree;

svá mikill lagamaðr, at, so great a lawyer, that;

3) with subj., denoting end or purpose, in order that (skáru þeir fyrir þá (viz. hestana) melinn, at þeir dœi eigi af sulti);

4) since, because, as (= því at);

5) connected with þó, því, svá;

þó at (with subj.), though, although;

því at, because, for;

svá at, so that;

6) temp., þá at (= þá er), when;

þegar at (= þegar er), as soon as;

þar til at (= þar til er), until, till;

áðr at (= á. en), before;

7) used superfluously after an int. pron. or adv.;

Ólafr spurði, hvern styrk at hann mundi fá honum, what help he was likely to give him;

in a relative sense; með fullkomnum ávexti, hverr at (which) þekkr ok þægiligr mun verða.

V)

negative verbal suffix, = ata; var-at, was not.

VI)

n. an incited conflict or fight ( see etja);

odda at, Yggs at, battle.

* * *

1.

and að, prep., often used ellipt. dropping the case and even merely as an adverb, [Lat. ad; Ulf. at = πρός and παρά, A. S. ät; Engl. at; Hel. ad = apud; O. H. G. az; lost in mod. Germ., and rare in Swed. and Dan.; in more freq. use in Engl. than any other kindred language, Icel. only excepted]:—the mod. pronunciation and spelling is að (aþ); this form is very old, and is found in Icel. vellum MSS. of the 12th century, e. g. aþ, 623. 60; yet in earlier times it was sounded with a tenuis, as we may infer from rhymes, e. g. jöfurr hyggi at | hve ek yrkja fat, Egill: Sighvat also makes it rhyme with a t. The verse by Thorodd—þar vastu at er fjáðr klæðið þvat (Skálda 162)—is hardly intelligible unless we accept the spelling with an aspirate (að), and say that þvað is = þvá = þváði, lavabat; it may be that by the time of Thorodd and Ari the pure old pronunciation was lost, or is ‘þvat’ simply the A. S. þvât, secuit? The Icelanders still, however, keep the tenuis in compounds before a vowel, or before h, v, or the liquids l, r, thus—atyrða, atorka, athöfn, athugi, athvarf, athlægi; atvinna, atvik; atlaga, atlíðanði ( slope), atriði, atreið, atróðr: but aðdjúpr, aðfinsla (critic), aðferð, aðkoma, aðsókn, aðsúgr (crowding), aðgæzla. In some words the pronunciation is irregular, e. g. atkvæði not aðkv-; atburðr, but aðbúnaðr; aðhjúkran not athjúkran; atgörvi not aðgörfi. At, to, towards; into; against; along, by; in regard to; after.

Mostly with dat.; rarely with acc.; and sometimes ellipt.—by dropping the words ‘home,’ ‘house,’ or the like—with gen.

WITH DAT.

A. LOC.

I. WITH MOTION; gener. the motion to the borders, limits of an object, and thus opp. to frá:

1. towards, against, with or without the notion of arrival, esp. connected with verbs denoting motion (verba movendi et eundi), e. g. fara, ganga, koma, lúta, snúa, rétta at…; Otkell laut at Skamkatli, O. louted (i. e. bowed down) towards S., Nj. 77, Fms. xi. 102; sendimaðrinn sneri ( turned) hjöltum sverðsins at konungi, towards the king, i. 15; hann sneri egginni at Ásgrími, turned the edge towards A., Nj. 220; rétta e-t at e-m, to reach, hand over, Ld. 132; ganga at, to step towards, Ísl. ii. 259.

2. denoting proximity, close up to, up to; Brynjólfr gengr … allt at honum, B. goes quite up to him, Nj. 58; Gunnarr kom þangat at þeim örunum, G. reached them even there with his arrows, 115; þeir kómust aldri at honum, they could never get near him, to close quarters, id.; reið maðr at þeim (up to them), 274; þeir höfðu rakit sporin allt at ( right up to) gammanum, Fms. i. 9; komu þeir at sjó fram, came down to the sea, Bárð. 180.

3. without reference to the space traversed, to or at; koma at landi, to land, Ld. 38, Fms. viii. 358; ríða at dyrum, Boll. 344; hlaupa at e-m, to run up to, run at, Fms. vii. 218, viii. 358; af sjáfarganginum er hann gekk at landinu, of the surf dashing against the shore, xi. 6; vísa ólmum hundi at manni, to set a fierce hound at a man, Grág. ii. 118; leggja e-n at velli, to lay low, Eg. 426, Nj. 117; hníga at jörðu, at grasi, at moldu, to bite the dust, to die, Njarð. 378; ganga at dómi, a law term, to go into court, of a plaintiff, defendant, or bystander, Nj. 87 (freq.)

4. denoting a motion along, into, upon; ganga at stræti, to walk along the street, Korm. 228, Fms. vii. 39; at ísi, on the ice, Skálda 198, Fms. vii. 19, 246, viii. 168, Eb. 112 new Ed. (á is perh. wrong); máttu menn ganga bar yfir at skipum einum, of ships alone used as a bridge, Fas. i. 378; at höfðum, at nám, to trample on the slain on the battle-field, Lex. Poët.; at ám, along the rivers; at merkiósum, at the river’s mouth, Grág. ii. 355; at endilöngu baki, all along its back, Sks. 100.

5. denoting hostility, to rush at, assault; renna at, hlaupa at, ganga, fara, ríða, sækja, at e-m, (v. those words), whence the nouns atrenna, athlaup, atgangr, atför, atreið, atsókn, etc.

β. metaph., kom at þeim svefnhöfgi, deep sleep fell on them, Nj. 104. Esp. of weather, in the impers. phrase, hríð, veðr, vind, storm görir at e-m, to be overtaken by a snow storm, gale, or the like; görði þá at þeim þoku mikla, they were overtaken by a thick fog, Bárð. 171.

6. denoting around, of clothing or the like; bregða skikkju at höfði sér, to wrap his cloak over his head, Ld. 62; vefja motri at höfði sér, to wrap a snood round her head, 188; sauma at, to stick, cling close, as though sewn on; sauma at höndum sér, of tight gloves, Bs. i. 453; kyrtill svá þröngr sem saumaðr væri at honum, as though it were stitched to him, Nj. 214; vafit at vándum dreglum, tight laced with sorry tags, id.; hosa strengd fast at beini, of tight hose, Eg. 602; hann sveipar at sér iðrunum ok skyrtunni, he gathers up the entrails close to him and the skirt too, Gísl. 71; laz at síðu, a lace on the side, to keep the clothes tight, Eg. 602.

β. of burying; bera grjót at einum, to heap stones upon the body, Eg. 719; var gör at þeim dys or grjóti, Ld. 152; gora kistu at líki, to make a coffin for a body, Eb. 264, Landn. 56, Ld. 142.

γ. of summoning troops or followers; stefna at sér mönnum, to summon men to him, Nj. 104; stefna at sér liði, Eg. 270; kippa mönnum at sér, to gather men in haste, Ld. 64.

7. denoting a business, engagement; ríða at hrossum, at sauðum, to go looking after after horses, watching sheep, Glúm. 362, Nj. 75; fara at fé, to go to seek for sheep, Ld. 240; fara at heyi, to go a-haymaking, Dropl. 10; at veiðum, a-hunting; at fuglum, a-fowling; at dýrum, a-sbooting; at fiski, a-fishing; at veiðiskap, Landn. 154, Orkn. 416 (in a verse), Nj. 25; fara at landskuldum, to go a-collecling rents, Eg. 516; at Finnkaupum, a-marketing with Finns, 41; at féföngum, a-plundering, Fms. vii. 78; ganga at beina, to wait on guests, Nj. 50; starfa at matseld, to serve at table, Eb. 266; hitta e-n at nauðsynjum, on matters of business; at máli, to speak with one, etc., Fms. xi. 101; rekast at e-m, to pursue one, ix. 404; ganga at liði sér, to go suing for help, Grág. ii. 384.

β. of festivals; snúa, fá at blóti, veizlu, brullaupi, to prepare for a sacrificial banquet, wedding, or the like, hence at-fangadagr, Eb. 6, Ld. 70; koma at hendi, to happen, befall; ganga at sínu, to come by one’s own, to take it, Ld. 208; Egill drakk hvert full er at honum kom, drained every horn that came to him, Eg. 210; komast at keyptu, to purchase dearly, Húv. 46.

8. denoting imaginary motion, esp. of places, cp. Lat. spectare, vergere ad…, to look or lie towards; horfði botninn at höfðanum, the bight of the bay looked toward the headland, Fms. i. 340, Landn. 35; also, skeiðgata liggr at læknum, leads to the brook, Ísl. ii. 339; á þann arminn er vissi at sjánum, on that wing which looked toward the sea, Fms. viii. 115; sár þau er horft höfðu at Knúti konungi, xi. 309.

β. even connected with verbs denoting motion; Gilsáreyrr gengr austan at Fljótinu, G. extends, projects to F. from the east, Hrafh. 25; hjá sundi því, er at gengr þingstöðinni, Fms. xi. 85.

II. WITHOUT MOTION; denoting presence at, near, by, at the side of, in, upon; connected with verbs like sitja, standa, vera…; at kirkju, at church, Fms. vii. 251, K. f). K. 16, Ld. 328, Ísl. ii. 270, Sks. 36; vera at skála, at húsi, to be in, at home, Landn. 154; at landi, Fms. i. 82; at skipi, on shipboard, Grág. i. 209, 215; at oldri, at a banquet, inter pocula; at áti, at dinner, at a feast, inter edendum, ii. 169, 170; at samförum ok samvistum, at public meetings, id.; at dómi, in a court; standa (to take one’s stand) norðan, sunnan, austan, vestan at dómi, freq. in the proceedings at trials in lawsuits, Nj.; at þingi, present at the parliament, Grág. i. 142; at lögbergi, o n the hill of laws, 17, Nj.; at baki e-m, at the back of.

2. denoting presence, partaking in; sitja at mat, to sit at meat, Fms. i. 241; vera at veizlu, brullaupi, to be at a banquet, nuptials, Nj. 51, Ld. 70: a law term, vera at vígi, to be an accessory in manslaying, Nj. 89, 100; vera at e-u simply means to be about, be busy in, Fms. iv. 237; standa at máli, to stand by one in a case, Grág. ii. 165, Nj. 214; vera at fóstri, to be fostered, Fms. i. 2; sitja at hégóma, to listen to nonsense, Ld. 322; vera at smíð, to be at one’s work, Þórð. 62: now absol., vera at, to go on with, be busy at.

3. the law term vinna eið at e-u has a double meaning:

α. vinna eið at bók, at baugi, to make an oath upon the book by laying the band upon it, Landn. 258, Grág., Nj.; cp. Vkv. 31, Gkv. 3. 3, Hkv. 2. 29, etc.: ‘við’ is now used in this sense.

β. to confirm a fact (or the like) by an oath, to swear to, Grág. i. 9, 327.

γ. the law phrase, nefna vátta at e-u, of summoning witnesses to a deed, fact, or the like; nefna vátta at benjum, to produce evidence, witnesses as to the wounds, Nj., Grág.; at görð, Eg. 738; at svörum, Grág. i. 19: this summoning of witnesses served in old lawsuits the same purpose as modern pleadings and depositions; every step in a suit to be lawful must be followed by such a summoning or declaration.

4. used ellipt., vera at, to be about, to be busy at; kvalararnir er at vóru at pína hann, who were tormenting him; þar varstu at, you were there present, Skálda 162; at várum þar, Gísl. (in a verse): as a law term ‘vera at’ means to be guilty, Glúm. 388; vartattu at þar, Eg. (in a verse); hence the ambiguity of Glum’s oath, vask at þar, I was there present: var þar at kona nokkur ( was there busy) at binda sár manna, Fms. v. 91; hann var at ok smíðaði skot, Rd. 313; voru Varbelgir at ( about) at taka af, þau lög …, Fms. ix. 512; ek var at ok vafk, I was about weaving, xi. 49; þeir höfðu verit at þrjú sumur, they had been busy at it for three summers, x. 186 (now very freq.); koma at, come in, to arrive unexpectedly; Gunnarr kom at í því, G. came in at that moment; hvaðan komtú nú at, whence did you come? Nj. 68, Fms. iii. 200.

5. denoting the kingdom or residence of a king or princely person; konungr at Danmörk ok Noregi, king of…, Fms. i. 119, xi. 281; konungr, jarl, at öllum Noregi, king, earl, over all N., íb. 3, 13, Landn. 25; konungr at Dyflinni, king of Dublin, 25; but í or yfir England!, Eg. 263: cp. the phrase, sitja at landi, to reside, of a king when at home, Hkr. i. 34; at Joini, Fms. xi. 74: used of a bishop; biskup at Hólum, bishop of Hólar, Íb. 18, 19; but biskup í Skálaholti, 19: at Rómi, at Rome, Fbr. 198.

6. in denoting a man’s abode (vide p. 5, col. 1, l. 27), the prep. ‘at’ is used where the local name implies the notion of by the side of, and is therefore esp. applied to words denoting a river, brook, rock, mountain, grove, or the like, and in some other instances, by, at, e. g. at Hofi (a temple), Landn. 198; at Borg ( a castle), 57; at Helgafelli (a mountain), Eb. constantly so; at Mosfelli, Landn. 190; at Hálsi (a hill), Fms. xi. 22; at Bjargi, Grett. 90; Hálsum, Landn. 143; at Á ( river), 296, 268; at Bægisá, 212; Giljá, 332; Myrká, 211; Vatnsá, id.; þverá, Glúm. 323; at Fossi (a ‘force’ or waterfall), Landn. 73; at Lækjamoti (waters-meeting), 332; at Hlíðarenda ( end of the lithe or hill), at Bergþórshváli, Nj.; at Lundi (a grove), at Melum (sandhill), Landn. 70: the prep. ‘á’ is now used in most of these cases, e. g. á Á, á Hofi, Helgafelli, Felli, Hálsi, etc.

β. particularly, and without any regard to etymology, used of the abode of kings or princes, to reside at; at Uppsölum, at Haugi, Alreksstöðum, at Hlöðum, Landn., Fms.

γ. konungr lét kalla at stofudyrum, the king made a call at the hall door, Eg. 88; þeir kölluðu at herberginu, they called at the inn, Fms. ix. 475.

7. used ellipt. with a gen., esp. if connected with such words as gista, to be a guest, lodge, dine, sup (of festivals or the like) at one’s home; at Marðar, Nj. 4; at hans, 74; þingfesti at þess bóanda, Grág. i. 152; at sín, at one’s own home, Eg. 371, K. Þ. K. 62; hafa náttstað at Freyju, at the abode of goddess Freyja, Eg. 603; at Ránar, at Ran’s, i. e. at Ran’s house, of drowned men who belong to the queen of the sea, Ran, Eb. 274; at hins heilaga Ólafs konungs, at St. Olave’s church, Fms. vi. 63: cp. ad Veneris, εις Κίμωνος.

B. TEMP.

I. at, denoting a point or period of time; at upphafi, at first, in the beginning, Ld. 104; at lyktum, at síðustu, at lokum, at last; at lesti, at last, Lex. Poët., more freq. á lesti; at skilnaði, at parting, at last, Band. 3; at fornu, in times of yore, formerly, Eg. 267, D. I. i. 635; at sinni, as yet, at present; at nýju, anew, of present time; at eilífu, for ever and ever; at skömmu, soon, shortly, Ísl. ii. 272, v. l.

II. of the very moment when anything happens, the beginning of a term; denoting the seasons of the year, months, weeks, the hours of the day; at Jólum, at Yule, Nj. 46; at Pálmadegi, on Palm Sunday, 273; at Páskum, at Easter; at Ólafsvöku, on St. Olave’s eve, 29th of July, Fms.; at vetri, at the beginning of the winter, on the day when winter sets in, Grág. 1. 151; at sumarmálum, at vetrnáttum; at Tvímánaði, when the Double month (August) begins, Ld. 256, Grág. i. 152; at kveldi, at eventide, Eg. 3; at því meli, at that time; at eindaga, at the term, 395; at eykð, at 4 o’clock p. m., 198; at öndverðri æfi Abra hams, Ver. II; at sinni, now at once, Fms. vi. 71; at öðruhverju, every now and then.

β. where the point of time is marked by some event; at þingi, at the meeting of parliament (18th to the 24th of June), Ld. 182; at féránsdómi, at the court of execution, Grág. i. 132, 133; at þinglausnum, at the close of the parliament (beginning of July), 140; at festarmálum, eðr at eiginorði, at betrothal or nuptials, 174; at skilnaði, when they parted, Nj. 106 (above); at öllum minnum, at the general drinking of the toasts, Eg. 253; at fjöru, at the ebb; at flæðum, at flood tide, Fms. viii. 306, Orkn. 428; at hrörum, at an inquest, Grág. i. 50 (cp. ii. 141, 389); at sökum, at prosecutions, 30; at sinni, now, as yet, v. that word.

III. ellipt., or adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr,’ of the future time:

1. ellipt., komanda or the like being understood, with reference to the seasons of the year; at sumri, at vetri, at hausti, at vári, next summer, winter…, Ísl. ii. 242; at miðju sumri, at ári, at Midsummer, next year, Fas. i. 516; at miðjum vetri, Fms. iv. 237,

2. adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr;’ at ári komanda, Bárð. 177; at vári er kemr, Dipl. iii. 6.

IV. used with an absolute dat. and with a pres. part.:

1. with pres. part.; at morni komanda, on the coming morrow, Fms. i. 263; at sér lifanda, in vivo, in his life time, Grág. ii. 202; at þeim sofundum, illis dormientibus, Hkr. i. 234; at öllum ásjándum, in the sight of all, Fms. x. 329; at úvitanda konungi, illo nesciente, without his knowledge, 227; at áheyranda höfðingjanum, in the chief’s bearing, 235.

2. of past time with a past part. (Lat. abl. absol.); at hræjum fundnum, on the bodies being found, Grág. ii. 87; at háðum dómum ok föstu þingi, during the session, the courts being set, i. 484; at liðnum sex vikum, after six weeks past, Band. 13; at svá búnu, so goru, svá komnu, svá mæltu (Lat. quibus rebus gestis, dictis, quo facto, dicto, etc.), v. those words; at úreyndu, without trial, without put ting one to the test, Ld. 76; at honum önduðum, illo mortuo.

3. ellipt. without ‘at;’ en þessum hlutum fram komnum, when all this has been done, Eb. 132.

V. in some phrases with a slight temp, notion; at görðum gildum, the fences being strong, Gþl. 387; at vörmu spori, at once, whilst the trail is warm; at úvörum, unawares, suddenly, Nj. 95, Ld. 132; at þessu, at this cost, on that condition, Eb. 38, Nj. 55; at illum leiki, to have a narrow escape, now við illan leik, Fms. ix. 473; at því, that granted, Grág. ii. 33: at því, at pessu, thereafter, thereupon, Nj. 76.

2. denoting succession, without interruption, one after another; hverr at öðrum, annarr maðr at öðrum, aðrir at öðrum; eina konu at annarri, Eg. 91, Fms. ii. 236, vi. 25, Bs. i. 22, 625. 80, H. E. i. 522.

C. METAPH. and in various cases:

I. denoting a transformation or change into, to, with the notion of destruction; brenna at ösku, at köldum kolum, to burn to ashes, to be quite destroyed, Fms. i. 105, Edda 3, Sturl. ii. 51: with the notion of transformation or transfiguration, in such phrases as, verða at e-u, göra e-t at e-u, to turn it into:

α. by a spell; verða at ormi, to become a snake, Fms. xi. 158; at flugdrekum, Gullþ. 7; urðu þau bönd at járni, Edda 40.

β. by a natural process it can often be translated by an acc. or by as; göra e-n at urðarmanni, to make him an outlaw, Eg. 728; græða e-n at orkumlamanni, to heal him so as to maim him for life, of bad treatment by a leech, Eb. 244: in the law terms, sár görist at ben, a wound turning into a ben, proving to be mortal, Grág., Nj.; verða at ljúgvætti, to prove to be a false evidence, Grág. i. 44; verða at sætt, to turn into reconciliation, Fms. i. 13; göra e-t at reiði málum, to take offence at, Fs. 20; at nýjum tíðindum, to tell as news, Nj. 14; verða fátt at orðum, to be sparing of words, 18; kveðr (svá) at orði, to speak, utter, 10; verða at þrifnaði, to geton well, Fms. vii. 196: at liði, at skaða, to be a help or hurt to one; at bana, to cause one’s death, Nj. 223, Eg. 21, Grág. ii. 29: at undrum, at hlátri, to become a wonder, a laughing-stock, 623. 35, Eg. 553.

II. denoting capacity, where it may be translated merely by as or for; gefa at Jólagjöf, to give for a Christmas-box, Eg. 516; at gjöf, for a present; at erfð, at láni, launum, as an inheritance, a loan; at kaupum ok sökum, for buying and selling, Ísl. ii. 223, Grág. i. 423; at solum, ii. 204; at herfangi, as spoil or plunder; at sakbótum, at niðgjöldum, as a compensation, weregeld, i. 339, ii. 171, Hkr. ii. 168; taka at gíslingu, to take as an hostage, Edda 15; eiga e-n at vin, at óvin, to have one as friend or foe, illt er at eiga þræl at eingavin, ‘tis ill to have a thrall for one’s bosom friend (a proverb), Nj. 77; fæða, eiga, at sonum (syni), to beget a son, Edda 8, Bs. i. 60 (but eiga at dóttur cannot be said); hafa möttul at yfirhöfn, Fms. vii. 201; verða nökkut at manni (mönnum), to turn out to be a worthy man; verða ekki at manni, to turn out a worthless person, xi. 79, 268.

2. in such phrases as, verða at orðum, to come towards, Nj. 26; var þat at erindum, Eg. 148; hafa at veizlum, to draw veizlur ( dues) from, Fms. iv. 275, Eg. 647; gora e-t at álitum, to take it into consideration, Nj. 3.

III. denoting belonging to, fitting, of parts of the whole or the like; vóru at honum (viz. the sword) hjölt gullbúin, the sword was ornamented with a hilt of gold, Ld. 330; umgörð at ( belonging to) sverði, Fs. 97 (Hs.) in a verse; en ef mór er eigi at landinu, if there be no turf moor belonging to the land, Grág. ii. 338; svá at eigi brotnaði nokkuð at Orminum, so that no harm happened to the ship Worm, Fms. x. 356; hvatki er meiðir at skipinu eðr at reiðinu eðr at viðum, damage done t o …, Grág. ii. 403; lesta ( to injure) hús at lásum, við eðr torfi, 110; ef land hefir batnað at húsum, if the land has been bettered as to its buildings, 210; cp. the phrase, göra at e-u, to repair: hamlaðr at höndum eðr fótum, maimed as to hands or feet, Eg. 14; heill at höndum en hrumr at fótum, sound in band, palsied in foot, Fms. vii. 12; lykill at skrá, a key belonging, fitting, to the latch; hurð at húsi; a key ‘gengr at’ ( fits) skrá; and many other phrases. 2. denoting the part by which a thing is held or to which it belongs, by; fá, taka at…, to grasp by …; þú tókt við sverði hans at hjöltunum, you took it by the bill, Fms. i. 15; draga út björninn at hlustum, to pull out the bear by the ears, Fas. ii. 237; at fótum, by the feet, Fms. viii. 363; mæla ( to measure) at hrygg ok at jaðri, by the edge or middle of the stuff, Grág. i. 498; kasta e-m at höfði, head foremost, Nj. 84; kjósa e-n at fótum, by the feet alone, Edda 46; hefja frændsemi at bræðrum, eða at systkynum, to reckon kinship by the brother’s or the sister’s side, Grág. i. 28; kjósa at afli, at álitum, by strength, sight, Gs. 8, belongs rather to the following.

IV. in respect of, as regards, in regard to, as to; auðigr at fé, wealthy of goods, Nj. 16, 30, 51; beztir hestar at reið, the best racehorses, 186; spekingr at viti, a man of great intellect, Ld. 124; vænn (fagr) at áliti, fair of face, Nj. 30, Bs. i. 61; kvenna vænst at ásjónu ok vits munum, of surpassing beauty and intellect, Ld. 122; fullkominn at hyggju, 18; um fram aðra menn at vinsældum ok harðfengi, of surpassing popularity and hardihood, Eb. 30.

2. a law term, of challenging jurors, judges, or the like, on account of, by reason of; ryðja ( to challenge) at mægðum, guðsifjum, frændsemi, hrörum …; at leiðarlengd, on account of distance, Grág. i. 30, 50, Nj. (freq.)

3. in arithm. denoting proportion; at helmingi, þriðjungi, fjórðungi, tíunda hluta, cp. Lat. ex asse, quadrante, for the half, third… part; máttr skal at magni (a proverb), might and main go together, Hkr. ii. 236; þú munt vera at því mikill fræðimaðr á kvæði, in the same proportion, as great, Fms. vi. 391, iii. 41; at e-s hluta, at… leiti, for one’s part, in turn, as far as one is con cerned, Grág. i. 322, Eg. 309, Fms. iii. 26 (freq.): at öðrum kosti, in the other case, otherwise (freq.) More gener., at öllu, öngu, in all (no) respects; at sumu, einhverju, nokkru, partly; at flestu, mestu, chiefly.

4. as a paraphrase of a genitive; faðir, móðir at barni (= barns); aðili at sök (= sakar a.); morðingi at barni (= barns), faðerni at barni (barns); illvirki at fé manna (cp. Lat. felo de se), niðrfall at sökum (saka), land gangr at fiskum (fiska), Fms. iv. 274, Grág. i. 277, 416, N. G. L. i. 340, K. Þ. K. 112, Nj. 21.

5. the phrase ‘at sér,’ of himself or in himself, either ellipt. or by adding the participle görr, and with the adverbs vel, ilia, or the like; denoting breeding, bearing, endowments, character …; væn kona, kurteis ok vel at sér, an accomplished, well-bred, gifted lady, Nj. I; vitr maðr ok vel at sér, a wise man and thoroughly good in feeling and bearing, 5; þú ert maðr vaskr ok vel at þér, 49; gerr at sér, accomplished, 51; bezt at sér görr, the finest, best bred man, 39, Ld. 124; en þó er hann svá vel at sér, so generous, Nj. 77; þeir höfðingjar er svá vóru vel at sér, so noble-minded, 198, Fms. i. 160: the phrase ‘at sér’ is now only used of knowledge, thus maðr vel að sér means clever, a man of great knowledge; illa að sér, a blockhead.

6. denoting relations to colour, size, value, age, and the like; hvitr, svartr, grár, rauðr … at lit, white, swarthy, gray, red … of colour, Bjarn. 55, 28, Ísl. ii. 213, etc.; mikill, lítill, at stærð, vexti, tall, small of size, etc.; ungr, gamall, barn, at aldri, young, old, a child of age; tvítugr, þrítugr … at aldri, twenty, thirty … years of age (freq.): of animals; kyr at fyrsta, öðrum … kálfi, a cow having calved once, twice…, Jb. 346: value, amount, currency of money, kaupa e-t at mörk, at a mark, N. G. L. 1. 352; ok er eyririnn at mörk, amounts to a mark, of the value of money, Grág. i. 392; verðr þá at hálfri murk vaðmála eyrir, amounts to a half a mark, 500.

β. metaph. of value, connected with verbs denoting to esteem, hold; meta, hafa, halda at miklu, litlu, vettugi, engu, or the like, to hold in high or low esteem, to care or not to care for (freq.): geta e-s at góðu, illu, öngu, to mention one favourably, unfavourably, indifferently … (freq.), prop. in connection with. In many cases it may be translated by in; ekki er mark at draumum, there is no meaning in dreams, no heed is to be paid to dreams, Sturl. ii. 217; bragð er at þá barnið finnr, it goes too far, when even a child takes offence (a proverb): hvat er at því, what does it mean? Nj. 11; hvert þat skip er vöxtr er at, any ship of mark, i. e. however small, Fms. xi. 20.

V. denoting the source of a thing:

1. source of infor mation, to learn, perceive, get information from; Ari nam ok marga fræði at Þuríði, learnt as her pupil, at her hands, as St. Paul at the feet of Gamaliel, (just as the Scotch say to speer or ask at a person); Ari nam at Þorgeiri afraðskoll, Hkr. (pref.); nema kunnáttu at e-m, used of a pupil, Fms. i. 8; nema fræði at e-m, xi. 396.

2. of receiving, acquiring, buying, from; þiggja e-t at e-m, to receive a thing at his hands, Nj. 51; líf, to be pardoned, Fms. x. 173; kaupa land at e-m, to buy it from, Landn. 72, Íb. II, (now af is more freq. in this sense); geta e-t at e-m, to obtain, procure at one’s hands, impetrare; þeirra manna er þeir megu þat geta at, who are willing to do that, Grág. i. I; heimta e-t at e-m (now af), to call in, demand (a debt, money), 279; fala e-t at e-m (now af), to chaffer for or cheapen anything, Nj. 73; sækja e-t at e-m, to ask, seek for; sækja heilræði ok traust at e-m, 98; leiga e-t at e-m (now af), to borrow, Grág. ii. 334; eiga e-t (fé, skuld) at e-m, to be owed money by any one, i. 399: metaph. to deserve of one, Nj. 113; eiga mikit at e-m, to have much to do with, 138; hafa veg, virðing, styrk, at, to derive honour, power from, Fms. vi. 71, Eg. 44, Bárð. 174; gagn, to be of use, Ld. 216; mein, tálma, mischief, disadvantage, 158, 216, cp. Eg. 546; ótta, awe, Nj. 68.

VI. denoting conformity, according to, Lat. secundum, ex, after; at fornum sið, Fms. i. 112; at sögn Ara prests, as Ari relates, on his authority, 55; at ráði allra vitrustu manna, at the advice of, Ísl. ii. 259, Ld. 62; at lögum, at landslögum, by the law of the land, Grág., Nj.; at líkindum, in all likelihood, Ld. 272; at sköpum, in due course (poet.); at hinum sama hætti, in the very same manner, Grág. i. 90; at vánum, as was to be expected, Nj. 255; at leyfi e-s, by one’s leave, Eg. 35; úlofi, Grág. ii. 215; at ósk, vilja e-s, as one likes…; at mun, id. (poet.); at sólu, happily (following the course of the sun), Bs. i. 70, 137; at því sem …, as to infer from …, Nj. 124: ‘fara, láta, ganga at’ denotes to yield, agree to, to comply with, give in, Ld. 168, Eg. 18, Fms. x. 368.

VII. in phrases nearly or quite adverbial; gróa, vera græddr, at heilu, to be quite healed, Bárð. 167, Eb. 148; bíta at snöggu, to bite it bare, Fms. xi. 6; at þurru, till it becomes dry, Eb. 276; at endilöngu, all along, Fas. ii; vinnast at litlu, to avail little, 655 x. 14; at fullu, fully, Nj. 257, Hkr. i. 171; at vísu, of a surety, surely, Ld. 40; at frjálsu, freely, 308; at líku, at sömu, equally, all the same, Hom. 80, Nj. 267; at röngu, wrongly, 686 B. 2; at hófi, temperately, Lex. Poët.; at mun, at ráði, at marki, to a great extent; at hringum, utterly, all round, (rare), Fms. x. 389; at einu, yet, Orkn. 358; svá at einu, því at einu, allt at einu, yet, however, nevertheless.

VIII. connected with comparatives of adverbs and adjectives, and strengthening the sense, as in Engl. ‘the,’ so much the more, all the more; ‘at’ heldr tveimr, at ek munda gjarna veita yðr öllum, where it may be translated by so much the more to two, as I would willingly grant it to all of you; hon grét at meir, she grat (wept) the more, Eg. 483; þykir oss at líkara, all the more likely, Fms. viii. 6; þess at harðari, all the harder, Sturl. iii. 202 C; svá at hinn sé bana at nær, Grág. ii. 117; at auðnara, at hólpnara, the more happy, Al. 19, Grett. 116 B; þess at meiri, Fms. v. 64; auvirðismaðr at meiri, Sturl. ii. 139; maðr at vaskari, id.; at feigri, any the more fey, Km. 22; maðr at verri, all the worse, Nj. 168; ok er ‘at’ firr…, at ek vil miklu heldr, cp. Lat. tantum abest… ut, Eg. 60.

β. following after a negation; eigi at síðr, no less, Nj. 160, Ld. 146; eigi… at meiri maðr, any better, Eg. 425, 489; erat héra at borgnara, any the better off for that, Fms. vii. 116; eigi at minni, no less for that, Edda (pref.) 146; eigi at minna, Ld. 216, Fms. ix. 50; ekki at verri drengr, not a bit worse for that, Ld. 42; er mér ekki son minn at bættari, þótt…, 216; at eigi vissi at nær, any more, Fas. iii. 74.

IX. following many words:

1. verbs, esp. those denoting, a. to ask, enquire, attend, seek, e. g. spyrja at, to speer (ask) for; leita at, to seek for; gæta, geyma at, to pay attention to; huga, hyggja at; hence atspurn, to enquire, aðgæzla, athugi, attention, etc.

β. verbs denoting laughter, play, joy, game, cp. the Engl. to play at …, to laugh at …; hlæja, brosa at e-u, to laugh, smile at it; leika (sér) at e-u, to play at; þykja gaman at, to enjoy; hæða, göra gys at …, to make sport at …

γ. verbs denoting assistance, help; standa, veita, vinna, hjálpa at; hence atstoð, atvinna, atverk:—mode, proceeding; fara at, to proceed, hence atför and atferli:—compliance; láta, fara at e-u, v. above:— fault; e-t er at e-u, there is some fault in it, Fms. x. 418; skorta at e-u, to fall short of, xi. 98:—care, attendance; hjúkra at, hlýja at, v. these words:—gathering, collecting; draga, reiða, flytja, fá at, congerere:—engagement, arrival, etc.; sækja at, to attack; ganga at, vera at, to be about; koma at, ellipt. to arrive: göra at, to repair: lesta at, to impair (v. above); finna at, to criticise (mod.); telja at, id.: bera at, to happen; kveða at e-m, to address one, 625. 15, (kveða at (ellipt.) now means to pronounce, and of a child to utter (read) whole syllables); falla at, of the flood-tide (ellipt.): metaph. of pains or straits surrounding one; þreyngja, herða at, to press hard: of frost and cold, with regard to the seasons; frjósa at, kólna at, to get really cold (SI. 44), as it were from the cold stiffening all things: also of the seasons themselves; hausta, vetra að, when the season really sets in; esp. the cold seasons, ‘sumra at’ cannot be used, yet we may say ‘vára að’ when the spring sets in, and the air gets mild.

δ. in numberless other cases which may partly be seen below.

2. connected ellipt. with adverbs denoting motion from a place; norðan, austan, sunnan, vestan at, those from the north, east…; utan at, innan at, from the outside or inside.

3. with adjectives (but rarely), e. g. kærr, elskr, virkr (affectionate), vandr (zealous), at e-m; v. these words.

WITH ACC.

TEMP.: Lat. post, after, upon, esp. freq. in poetry, but rare in prose writers, who use eptir; nema reisi niðr at nið (= maðr eptir mann), in succession, of erecting a monument, Hm. 71; in prose, at þat. posthac, deinde, Fms. x. 323, cp. Rm., where it occurs several times, 2, 6, 9, 14, 18, 24, 28, 30, 35; sonr á at taka arf at föður sinn, has to take the inheritance after his father, Grág. i. 170 new Ed.; eiga féránsdóm at e-n, Grág. i. 89; at Gamla fallinn, after the death of G., Fms. x. 382; in Edda (Gl.) 113 ought to be restored, grét ok at Oð, gulli Freyja, she grat (wept) tears of gold for her lost husband Od. It is doubtful if it is ever used in a purely loc. sense; at land, Grág. (Sb.)ii. 211, is probably corrupt; at hönd = á hönd, Grág. (Sb.) i. 135; at mót = at móti, v. this word.

☞ In compounds (v. below) at- or að- answers in turn to Lat. ad- or in- or con-; atdráttr e. g. denotes collecting; atkoma is adventus: it may also answer to Lat. ob-, in atburðr = accidence, but might also be compared with Lat. occurrere.

2.

and að, the mark of the infinitive [cp. Goth. du; A. S. and Engl. to; Germ. zu]. Except in the case of a few verbs ‘at’ is always placed immediately before the infinitive, so as to be almost an inseparable part of the verb.

I. it is used either,

1. as, a simple mark of the infinitive, only denoting an action and independent of the subject, e. g. at ganga, at hlaupa, at vita, to go, to run, to know; or,

2. in an objective sense when following such verbs as bjóða segja…, to invite, command …; hann bauð þeim at ganga, at sitja, be bade, ordered them to go, sit, or the like; or as gefa and fá; gefa e-m at drekka, at eta, to give one to drink or to eat, etc. etc.

β. with the additional notion of intention, esp. when following verba cogitandi; hann ætlaði, hafði í hyggju at fara, he had it in his mind to go (where ‘to go’ is the real object to ætlaði and hafði í hyggju).

3. answering to the Gr. ινα, denoting intention, design, in order to; hann gékk í borg at kaupa silfr, in order to buy, Nj. 280; hann sendi riddara sína með þeim at varðveita þær, 623. 45: in order to make the phrase more plain, ‘svá’ and ‘til’ are frequently added, esp. in mod. writers, ‘svá at’ and contr. ‘svát’ (the last however is rare), ‘til at’ and ‘til þess at,’ etc.

II. in the earlier times the infin., as in Greek and Lat., had no such mark; and some verbs remain that cannot be followed by ‘at;’ these verbs are almost the same in Icel. as in Engl.:

α. the auxiliary verbs vil, mun ( μέλλω), skal; as in Engl. to is never used after the auxiliaries shall, will, must; ek vil ganga, I will go; ek mun fara, (as in North. E.) I mun go; ek skal göra þat, I shall do that, etc.

β. the verbs kunna, mega, as in Engl. I can or may do, I dare say; svá hygginn at hann kunni fyrir sökum ráða, Grág. ii. 75; í öllu er prýða má góðan höfðingja, Nj. 90; vera má, it may be; vera kann þat, id.: kunnu, however, takes ‘at’ whenever it means to know, and esp. in common language in phrases such as, það kann að vera, but vera kann þat, v. above.

γ. lata, biðja, as in Engl. to let, to bid; hann lét (bað) þá fara, he let (bade) them go.

δ. þykkja, þykjast, to seem; hann þykir vera, he is thought to be: reflex., hann þykist vera, sibi videtur: impers., mér þykir vera, mibi videtur, in all cases without ‘at.’ So also freq. the verbs hugsa, hyggja, ætla, halda, to think, when denoting merely the act of thinking; but if there be any notion of intention or purpose, they assume the ‘at;’ thus hann ætlaði, hugði, þá vera góða menn, he thought them to be, acc. c. inf.; but ætlaði at fara, meant to go, etc.

ε. the verbs denoting to see, bear; sjá, líta, horfa á … ( videre); heyra, audire, as in Engl. I saw them come, I heard him tell, ek sá þá koma, ek heyrði hann tala.

ζ. sometimes after the verbs eiga and ganga; hann gékk steikja, be went to roast, Vkv. 9; eiga, esp. when a mere periphrasis instead of skal, móður sína á maðr fyrst fram færa (better at færa), Grág. i. 232; á þann kvið einskis meta, 59; but at meta, id. l. 24; ráða, nema, göra …, freq. in poetry, when they are used as simple auxiliary verbs, e. g. nam hann sér Högna hvetja at rúnum, Skv. 3. 43.

η. hljóta and verða, when used in the sense of must (as in Engl. he must go), and when placed after the infin.of another verb; hér muntu vera hljóta, Nj. 129; but hljóta at vera: fara hlýtr þú, Fms. 1. 159; but þú hlýtr at fara: verða vita, ii. 146; but verða at vita: hann man verða sækja, þó verðr (= skal) maðr eptir mann lifa, Fms. viii. 19, Fas. ii. 552, are exceptional cases.

θ. in poetry, verbs with the verbal neg. suffix ‘-at,’ freq. for the case of euphony, take no mark of the infinitive, where it would be indispensable with the simple verb, vide Lex. Poët. Exceptional cases; hvárt sem hann vill ‘at’ verja þá sök, eða, whatever he chooses, either, Grág. i. 64; fyrr viljum vér enga kórónu at bera, en nokkut ófrelsi á oss at taka, we would rather bear no crown than …, Fms. x. 12; the context is peculiar, and the ‘at’ purposely added. It may be left out ellipt.; e. g. þá er guð gefr oss finnast (= at finnast), Dipl. ii. 14; gef honum drekka (= at drekka), Pr. 470; but mostly in unclassical writers, in deeds, or the like, written nastily and in an abrupt style.

3.

and að, conj. [Goth. þatei = οτι; A. S. þät; Engl. that; Germ, dass; the Ormul. and Scot. at, see the quotations sub voce in Jamieson; in all South-Teutonic idioms with an initial dental: the Scandinavian idioms form an exception, having all dropped this consonant; Swed. åt, Dan. at]. In Icel. the Bible translation (of the 16th century) was chiefly based upon that of Luther; the hymns and the great bulk of theol. translations of that time were also derived from Germany; therefore the germanised form það frequently appears in the Bible, and was often employed by theol. authors in sermons since the time of the Reformation. Jón Vidalin, the greatest modern Icel. preacher, who died in 1720, in spite of his thoroughly classical style, abounds in the use of this form; but it never took root in the language, and has never passed into the spoken dialect. After a relative or demonstr. pronoun, it freq. in mod. writers assumes the form eð, hver eð, hverir eð, hvað eð, þar eð. Before the prep. þú (tu), þ changes into t, and is spelt in a single word attú, which is freq. in some MS.;—now, however, pronounced aððú, aððeir, aððið …, = að þú…, with the soft Engl. th sound. It gener. answers to Lat. ut, or to the relat. pron. qui.

I. that, relative to svá, to denote proportion, degree, so…, that, Lat. tam, tantus, tot…, ut; svá mikill lagamaðr, at…, so great a lawyer, that…, Nj. 1; hárið svá mikit, at þat…, 2; svá kom um síðir því máli, at Sigvaldi, it came so far, that…, Fms. xi. 95, Edda 33. Rarely and unclass., ellipt. without svá; Bæringr var til seinn eptir honum, at hann … (= svá at), Bær. 15; hlífði honum, at hann sakaði ekki, Fas. iii. 441.

II. it is used,

1. with indic, in a narrative sense, answering partly to Gr. οτι, Lat. quod, ut, in such phrases as, it came to pass, happened that …; þat var einhverju sinni, at Höskuldr hafði vinaboð, Nj. 2; þat var á palmdrottinsdag, at Ólafr konungr gékk út um stræti, Fms. ii. 244.

2. with subj. answering to Lat. acc. with infin., to mark the relation of an object to the chief verb, e. g. vilda ek at þú réðist, I wished that you would, Nj. 57.

β. or in an oblique sentence, answering to ita ut…; ef svá kann verða at þeir láti…, if it may be so that they might…, Fms. xi. 94.

γ. with a subj. denoting design, answering to ϊνα or Lat. ut with subj., in order that; at öll veraldar bygðin viti, ut sciat totus orbis, Stj.; þeir skáru fyrir þá melinn, at þeir dæi eigi af sulti, ut ne fame perirent, Nj. 265; fyrsti hlutr bókarinnar er Kristindómsbálkr, at menn skili, in order that men may understand, Gþl. p. viii.

III. used in connection with conjunctions,

1. esp. þó, því, svá; þó at freq. contr. þótt; svát is rare and obsolete.

α. þóat, þótt (North. E. ‘thof’), followed by a subjunctive, though, although, Lat. etsi, quamquam (very freq.); þóat nokkurum mönnum sýnist þetta með freku sett… þá viljum vér, Fms. vi. 21: phrases as, gef þú mér þó at úverðugri, etsi indignae (dat.), Stj. MS. col. 315, are unclass., and influenced by the Latin: sometimes ellipt. without ‘þó,’ eigi mundi hón þá meir hvata göngu sinni, at (= þóat) hon hraeddist bana sinn, Edda 7, Nj. 64: ‘þó’ and ‘at’ separated, svarar hann þó rétt, at hann svari svá, Grág. i. 23; þó er rétt at nýta, at hann sé fyrr skorinn, answering to Engl. yet—though, Lat. attamen —etsi, K. Þ. K.

β. því at, because, Lat. nam, quia, with indic.; því at allir vóru gerfiligir synir hans, Ld. 68; því at af íþróttum verðr maðr fróðr, Sks. 16: separated, því þegi ek, at ek undrumst, Fms. iii. 201; því er þessa getið, at þat þótti, it i s mentioned because …, Ld. 68.

γ. svá at, so that, Lat. ut, ita ut; grátrinn kom upp, svá at eingi mátti öðrum segja, Edda 37: separated, so … that, svá úsvúst at …, so bad weather, that, Bs. i. 339, etc.

2. it is freq. used superfluously, esp. after relatives; hver at = hverr, quis; því at = því, igitur; hverr at þekkr ok þægiligr mun verða, Fms. v. 159; hvern stvrk at hann mundi fá, 44; ek undrumst hvé mikil ógnarraust at liggr í þér, iii. 201; því at ek mátti eigi þar vera elligar, því at þar var kristni vel haldin, Fas. i. 340.

IV. as a relat. conj.:

1. temp, when, Lat. quum; jafnan er ( est) mér þá verra er ( quum) ek fer á braut þaðan, en þá at ( quum) ek kem, Grett. 150 A; þar til at vér vitum, till we know, Fms. v. 52; þá at ek lýsta (= þá er), when, Nj. 233.

2. since, because; ek færi yðr (hann), at þér eruð í einum hrepp allir, because of your being all of the same Rape, Grág. i. 260; eigi er kynlegt at ( though) Skarphéðinn sé hraustr, at þat er mælt at…, because (since) it is a saying that…, Nj. 64.

V. in mod. writers it is also freq. superfluously joined to the conjunctions, ef að = ef, si, (Lv. 45 is from a paper MS.), meðan að = meðan, dum; nema að, nisi; fyrst að = fyrst, quoniam; eptir að, síðan að, postquam; hvárt að = hvárt, Lat. an. In the law we find passages such as, þá er um er dæmt eina sök, at þá eigu þeir aptr at ganga í dóminn, Grág. i. 79; ef þing ber á hina helgu viku, at þat á eigi fyrir þeim málum at standa, 106; þat er ok, at þeir skulu reifa mál manna, 64; at þeir skulu með váttorð þá sök sækja, 65: in all these cases ‘at’ is either superfluous or, which is more likely, of an ellipt. nature, ‘the law decrees’ or ‘it is decreed’ being understood. The passages Sks. 551, 552, 568, 718 B, at lokit (= at ek hefi lokit), at hugleitt (= at ek hefi h.), at sent (= at ek hefi sent) are quite exceptional.

4.

and að, an indecl. relat. pronoun [Ulf. þatei = ος, ος αν, οστις, οσπερ, οιος, etc.; Engl. that, Ormul. at], with the initial letter dropped, as in the conj. at, (cp. also the Old Engl. at, which is both a conj. and a pronoun, e. g. Barbour vi. 24 in Jamieson: ‘I drede that his gret wassalage, | And his travail may bring till end, | That at men quhilc full litil wend.’ | ‘His mestyr speryt quhat tithings a t he saw.’—Wyntoun v. 3. 89.) In Icel. ‘er’ (the relat. pronoun) and ‘at’ are used indifferently, so that where one MS. reads ‘er,’ another reads ‘at,’ and vice versâ; this may easily be seen by looking at the MSS.; yet as a rule ‘er’ is much more freq. used. In mod. writers ‘at’ is freq. turned into ‘eð,’ esp. as a superfluous particle after the relative pron. hverr (hver eð, hvað eð, hverir eð, etc.), or the demonstr. sá (sá eð, þeir eð, hinir eð, etc.):—who, which, that, enn bezta grip at ( which) hafði til Íslands komið, Ld. 202; en engi mun sá at ( cui) minnisamara mun vera, 242; sem blótnaut at ( quae) stærst verða, Fms. iii. 214; þau tiðendi, at mér þætti verri, Nj. 64, etc. etc.

5.

n. collision (poët.); odda at, crossing of spears, crash of spears, Höfuðl. 8.

β. a fight or bait of wild animals, esp. of horses, v. hesta-at and etja.

6.

the negative verbal suffix, v. -a.

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > AT
7 OF

I)

prep.

1) with dat. and acc., over = yfir (fara of fjöll; sitja of borði); of time, = um; of haust or of haustum, in the autumn; of aptaninn, in the evening; of hríð, for a while; of allt, always;

2) with acc. of, about (bera vitni of e-t);

3) in a casual sense, poet.; of sanna sök, for a just cause, justly.

II)

an enclitic particle, chiefly placed before verbs; ek drykk of gat ens dýra mjaðar, I got a draught of the precious mead.

III)

n.

1) great quantity, number; of fjár, immensity of wealth; of liðs, a vast host of men;

2) excess; við of, to excess; þótti hirðmönnum hans við of, they thought it was beyond measure;

3) pride, conceit (kirkjan verðr eigi svá mikil, at þar muni of þitt allt í liggja).

IV)

adv.

1) with adjectives and adverbs; too; of gamall, ungr, langr, stuttr, too old, young, long, short; of mjök, too much; of lengi, too long;

2) with the neuter of a past part. over-much, too much; hafa of drukkit, to have drunk too much; hafa of gört, to have transgressed; hafa of mælt, to have said too much; hafa of tekið við e-n, to have gone too far.

* * *

1.

prep. with dat. and acc., the form varies; umb is an obsolete and rare form, hence um, sounded umm, which is far the most common form in old writers, and has altogether superseded both umb and of: [the ‘of’ answers nearest to Ulf. uf; O. H. G. oba; Germ. ob; Gr. ὑπό; Lat. sub; Sansk. upa.] Most of the oldest vellums, as also the poets, prefer to use ‘of,’ yet not all, for the Cod. Reg. of Sæm. Edda in nine cases out of ten writes um, so also did the Cod. Acad. primus (the Kringla) of the Hkr.; and this is important, for these two vellums are our chief sources for old poetry; on the other hand, the Cod. Reg. of the Snorra Edda prefers ‘of.’ Among other vellums the old fragment of the Orkn. S. (Arna-Magn. No. 325) mostly uses ‘of’ as of nóttina, Orkn. 110; of hans daga, 178; of Jól, 180; of daga þeirra bræðra, 182; but also ‘um’ e. g. ofan um sik, ofan um hann, id. The word will be given in full under letter U, so that a few references may suffice here:

I. in the sense over, Lat. super, with dat. and acc.,

α. jörð grær of ágætum barma, Eg. (in a verse); brann of fylki, Ýt.; of svírum, Hornklofi; dík flæði of líkum, Fms. xi. 191; sjár þýtr of árum, vi. (in a verse); of bý breiðum, Lex. Poët.

β. with acc., of nýt regin, Vþm. 13; of dróttmögu, 11; of liðu, Sdm. 9; of sumar, Vsp. 40; of garð risa, Gs.; of lopt ok lög, Hkv.; úlfr gengr of ýnglings börn, Eg. (in a verse); vestr fór ek of ver, Höfuðl. 1; liggja of ungan Mörukára, Fms. vi. (in a verse).

II. in a causal sense = Lat. ob; of sanna sök, for a just sake, justly, Fms. ii. 322 (in a verse); of minna, for a less cause, Glúm, (in a verse); of litla sök, Lex. Poët.; of sannar deildir, id.; of minni sorgir, Korm. (in a verse).

2.

and um, an enclytic particle, chiefly placed before verbs or participles, seldom before nouns; it is obsolete, and occurs only in old poetry and now and then in the oldest prose; the spelling varies, for here too the Cod. Reg. of Sæm. Edda, as also the Kringla, mostly prefer um, so as to take examples from the poem Hm., um skoðask, um skygnask, 1; um getr, 8; um á ( owns), 9; þylsk hann um, um getr, 17; um farit, 18; síns um máls, 21; um gelr, 29; um þörf, 38; um getr, 58, 65; um dvelr, 59; um viðrir, 74; um lagit, 84; um vakin, 100; um komin, um sofin, 101; um kominn, 104; um gaf, 105; um geta, 123; um heilli, 129; um reist, 145; um stendr, 154; um kann, 163: of gat, 140; of alinn, 72; of kom, 145; of vitaðr, 100; of blótið, 145: vf, vf boðit, 67; vf heimtir, 14: thus in this single poem ‘um’ occurs about twenty-four times, ‘of’ five times, and ‘vf’ twice: for the other poems see Bugge’s Edition: on the other hand, of traddi, Gh. 2; of þrumir, Gm. 8; of hyggi, 34; at ek öllum öl yðr of heita, Hým. 3; of geta, 4; of teknir, 14; of heitt, 32:—in prose, ef maðr má eigi of koma, Grág. ii. 209; of förlar, Kb. 14; of telrat, 178; er héðan of sér, Ísl. (Heiðarv. S.) ii. 387; en ér of sét eigi ljós, but you see not the light, 645. 81; at eigi of sá á miðli, Íb. 11; má of rannsaka, 677. 6; þó at báðum of göri, 2; ok af því of eykr eigi atkvæði, Skálda (Thorodd) 165; sem menn of bera megu, Hom. (St.); at hann megi jafnfúss of vera, id., and passim in that old vellum, see Fritzner’s Dict. s. v.; ef því um náir, Grág. (Kb.) 209; ef þeir um sitja, 74; um ves, 76; um taki, 89; um göra (twice), 109; um telrat, 194; urn býðr, 230; um komi, 234; ef sól um sæi, if the sun was to be seen, ch. 29.

II. seldom before nouns; síns um máls, Hm. (see above); um þörf, 38; as hans of dólgr, Skv.; Baldrs of barmi, Haustl.; öll of rök, Alm. 9; of sköpt, kinsmen, Edda (Gl.), Lex. Poët.; of tregi, Gkv. 1. 3 (thus Bugge in two words); Þórs of rúni, Haustl.; of kúgi, an oppressor, Fms. vii. (in a verse); with adjectives, of reiðr, Skm.: it remains in some old sayings or phrases, án er íllt um gengi; um seinan, Nj. 91.

3.

adv. [this particle is closely akin to the prep. of; the extended form ofr- (q. v.) is mostly used in compds, not singly, and answers to Gr. ὑπέρ, Lat. super, Engl. above]:

1. as subst. excess, pride, conceit; því at hón verðr eigi svá mikil, at þar muni of þitt allt í liggja, Ld. 318; við of, to excess, Ísl. ii. 154; þótti hirðmönnum hans við of, hversu mikit, they thought it was beyond measure, Vígl. 17; um of, to excess: the phrase, of sem van, too much or too little; það er of sem van.

2. with gen., of fjár, immensity of wealth, Nj. 9, 27, Eg. 68, Ó. H. 198; of liðs, a vast host of men, Hkr. ii. 265; of manna, Fms. vi. 146.

B. Adv. too, Lat. nimis, and may be used with any adjective; when with adjectives it is better written separately, of gamall, too old; of ungr, too young, Ld. 262; of langr, of stuttr, Art. 96; of stórr, of lítill, Eg. 50; of harðr, of linr, of góðr, of vándr, of kaldr, of heitr, of magr, of feitr, of digr, of breiðr, of mjór, of hár, of lágr, of víðr, of þröngr, of margr, of fár, of mart, Njarð. 372; of þögull, of heimskr, of máligr, Art. 30, 82.

2. with adverbs; of mjök, too much, Eg. 226, Ísl. ii. 391; of fjarri, Fms. ii. 181; of lengi, too long, x. 379; of seint, too late. Art. 96; of snemma, of árla, too early; cp. um of viða, of sjaldan, of opt, etc.

II. with the neut. of a past part., overmuch, too much, with the notion of having overdone or sometimes wishing not to have done it; hafa of drukkit, to have drunk too much, Gm. 51; hafa of aukit, Eg. 202, Hkr. ii. 209; hafa of gefit, to have given more than one likes, Ld. 318; hafa of gört, to have transgressed, Nj. 221, Fms. xi. 333; eigi of hefnt, Grett. 124; hafa of keypt, bought too dear, Jb. 372; hafa of mælt, Fms. i. 163; þykjast hafa of talað, wish one had not said it; sé mér þetta of mælt, Mar.; hafa of tekið við e-n, to have gone too far, Fms. viii. 258; hafa of seinat, too late, Ld. 144, Fas. i. 196; um seinat, Fms. viii. 162:—‘of’ is opp. to ‘van-,’ too much, too little, hafa van-dæmt, of-dæmt, of-mælt, Gþl. 378; van-refst of-refst, 272; of-talt van-talt, 477; of-alnir, van-alnir, Grág. i. 455.

III. rarely with verbs; of-tala, to talk too much.

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > OF
8 ad

ad, prep. with acc. (from the fourth century after Christ written also at; Etrusc. suf. -a; Osc. az; Umbr. and Old Lat. ar, as [p. 27] in Eug. Tab., in S. C. de Bacch., as arveho for adveho; arfuerunt, arfuisse, for adfuerunt, etc.; arbiter for adbiter; so, ar me advenias, Plant. Truc. 2, 2, 17; cf. Prisc. 559 P.; Vel. Long. 2232 P.; Fabretti, Glos. Ital. col. 5) [cf. Sanscr. adhi; Goth. and Eng. at; Celt. pref. ar, as armor, i.e. ad mare; Rom. a].
I.
As antith. to ab (as in to ex), in a progressive order of relation, ad denotes, first, the direction toward an object; then the reaching of or attaining to it; and finally, the being at or near it.
A.
In space.
1.
Direction toward, to, toward, and first,
a.
Horizontally:
fugere ad puppim colles campique videntur,
the hills and fields appear to fly toward the ship, Lucr. 4, 390: meridie umbrae cadunt ad septentrionem, ortu vero ad occasum, to or toward the north and west, Plin. 2, 13, and so often of the geog. position of a place in reference to the points of compass, with the verbs jacere, vergere, spectare, etc.:
Asia jacet ad meridiem et austrum, Europa ad septentriones et aquiionem,
Varr. L. L. 5, § 31 Mull.;
and in Plin. very freq.: Creta ad austrum... ad septentrionem versa, 4, 20: ad Atticam vergente, 4, 21 al.—Also trop.: animus alius ad alia vitia propensior,
Cic. Tusc. 4, 37, 81.—
b.
In a direction upwards (esp. in the poets, very freq.): manusque sursum ad caelum sustulit, Naev. ap. Non. 116, 30 (B. Pun. p. 13, ed. Vahl.): manus ad caeli templa tendebam lacrimans, Enn. ap. Cic. Div. 1, 20, 40 (Ann. v. 50 ed. Vahl.); cf.:
duplices tendens ad sidera palmas,
Verg. A. 1, 93: molem ex profundo saxeam ad caelum vomit, Att. ap. Prisc. 1325 P.: clamor ad caelum volvendus, Enn. ap. Varr. L. L. 7, § 104 Mull. (Ann. v. 520 ed. Vahl.) (cf. with this: tollitur in caelum clamor, Enn. ap. Macr. S. 6, 1, or Ann. v. 422):
ad caelumque ferat flammai fulgura rursum, of Aetna,
Lucr. 1, 725; cf. id. 2, 191; 2, 325: sidera sola micant;
ad quae sua bracchia tendens, etc.,
Ov. M. 7, 188:
altitudo pertingit ad caelum,
Vulg. Dan. 4, 17.—
c.
Also in the direction downwards (for the usu. in):
tardiore semper ad terras omnium quae geruntur in caelo effectu cadente quam visu,
Plin. 2, 97, 99, § 216.
2.
The point or goal at which any thing arrives.
a.
Without reference to the space traversed in passing, to, toward (the most common use of this prep.): cum stupro redire ad suos popularis, Naev. ap. Fest. p. 317 Mull. (B. Pun. p. 14 ed. Vahl.):
ut ex tam alto dignitatis gradu ad superos videatur potius quam ad inferos pervenisse,
Cic. Lael. 3, 12: ad terras decidat aether, Lucan. 2, 58. —Hence,
(α).
With verbs which designate going, coming, moving, bearing, bringing near, adapting, taking, receiving, calling, exciting, admonishing, etc., when the verb is compounded with ad the prep. is not always repeated, but the constr. with the dat. or acc. employed; cf. Rudd. II. pp. 154, 175 n. (In the ante-class. per., and even in Cic., ad is generally repeated with most verbs, as, ad eos accedit, Cic. Sex. Rosc. 8:
ad Sullam adire,
id. ib. 25:
ad se adferre,
id. Verr. 4, 50:
reticulum ad naris sibi admovebat,
id. ib. 5, 27:
ad laborem adhortantur,
id. de Sen. 14:
T. Vectium ad se arcessit,
id. Verr. 5, 114; but the poets of the Aug. per., and the historians, esp. Tac., prefer the dative; also, when the compound verb contains merely the idea of approach, the constr. with ad and the acc. is employed; but when it designates increase, that with the dat. is more usual: accedit ad urbem, he approaches the city; but, accedit provinciae, it is added to the province.)—
(β).
Ad me, te, se, for domum meam, tuam, suam (in Plaut. and Ter. very freq.):
oratus sum venire ad te huc,
Plaut. Mil. 5, 1, 12: spectatores plaudite atque ite ad vos comissatum, id. Stich. fin.:
eamus ad me,
Ter. Eun. 3, 5, 64:
ancillas traduce huc ad vos,
id. Heaut. 4, 4, 22:
transeundumst tibi ad Menedemum,
id. 4, 4, 17: intro nos vocat ad sese, tenet intus apud se, Lucil. ap. Charis. p. 86 P.:
te oro, ut ad me Vibonem statim venias,
Cic. Att. 3, 3; 16, 10 al.—
(γ).
Ad, with the name of a deity in the gen., is elliptical for ad templum or aedem (cf.:
Thespiadas, quae ad aedem Felicitatis sunt,
Cic. Verr. 4, 4; id. Phil. 2, 35:
in aedem Veneris,
Plaut. Poen. 1, 2, 120;
in aedem Concordiae,
Cic. Cat. 3, 9, 21;
2, 6, 12): ad Dianae,
to the temple of, Ter. Ad. 4, 2, 43:
ad Opis,
Cic. Att. 8, 1, 14:
ad Castoris,
id. Quint. 17:
ad Juturnae,
id. Clu. 101:
ad Vestae,
Hor. S. 1, 9, 35 al.: cf. Rudd. II. p. 41, n. 4, and p. 334.—
(δ).
With verbs which denote a giving, sending, informing, submitting, etc., it is used for the simple dat. (Rudd. II. p. 175): litteras dare ad aliquem, to send or write one a letter; and: litteras dare alicui, to give a letter to one; hence Cic. never says, like Caesar and Sall., alicui scribere, which strictly means, to write for one (as a receipt, etc.), but always mittere, scribere, perscribere ad aliquem:
postea ad pistores dabo,
Plaut. As. 3, 3, 119:
praecipe quae ad patrem vis nuntiari,
id. Capt. 2, 2, 109:
in servitutem pauperem ad divitem dare,
Ter. Ph. 4, 3, 48:
nam ad me Publ. Valerius scripsit,
Cic. Fam. 14, 2 med.:
de meis rebus ad Lollium perscripsi,
id. ib. 5, 3:
velim domum ad te scribas, ut mihi tui libri pateant,
id. Att. 4, 14; cf. id. ib. 4, 16:
ad primam (sc. epistulam) tibi hoc scribo,
in answer to your first, id. ib. 3, 15, 2:
ad Q. Fulvium Cons. Hirpini et Lucani dediderunt sese,
Liv. 27, 15, 1; cf. id. 28, 22, 5.—Hence the phrase: mittere or scribere librum ad aliquem, to dedicate a book to one (Greek, prosphônein):
has res ad te scriptas, Luci, misimus, Aeli,
Lucil. Sat. 1, ap. Auct. Her. 4, 12:
quae institueram, ad te mittam,
Cic. Q. Fr. 3, 5: ego interea admonitu tuo perfeci sane argutulos libros ad Varronem;
and soon after: mihi explices velim, maneasne in sententia, ut mittam ad eum quae scripsi,
Cic. Att. 13, 18; cf. ib. 16; Plin. 1, 19.—So in titles of books: M. Tullii Ciceronis ad Marcum Brutum Orator; M. T. Cic. ad Q. Fratrem Dialogi tres de Oratore, etc.—In the titles of odes and epigrams ad aliquem signifies to, addressed to. —
(ε).
With names of towns after verbs of motion, ad is used in answer to the question Whither? instead of the simple acc.; but commonly with this difference, that ad denotes to the vicinity of, the neighborhood of:
miles ad Capuam profectus sum, quintoque anno post ad Tarentum,
Cic. de Sen. 4, 10; id. Fam. 3, 81:
ad Veios,
Liv. 5, 19; 14, 18; cf. Caes. B. G. 1, 7; id. B. C. 3, 40 al.—Ad is regularly used when the proper name has an appellative in apposition to it:
ad Cirtam oppidum iter constituunt,
Sall. J. 81, 2; so Curt. 3, 1, 22; 4, 9, 9;
or when it is joined with usque,
Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 34, § 87; id. Deiot, 7, 19.— (When an adjective is added, the simple acc. is used poet., as well as with ad:
magnum iter ad doctas proficisci cogor Athenas,
Prop. 3, 21, 1; the simple acc., Ov. H. 2, 83: doctas jam nunc eat, inquit, Athenas).—
(ζ).
With verbs which imply a hostile movement toward, or protection in respect to any thing, against = adversus:
nonne ad senem aliquam fabricam fingit?
Ter. Heaut. 3, 2, 34:
Lernaeas pugnet ad hydras,
Prop. 3, 19, 9: neque quo pacto fallam, nec quem dolum ad eum aut machinam commoliar, old poet in Cic. N. D. 3, 29, 73:
Belgarum copias ad se venire vidit,
Caes. B. G. 2, 5; 7, 70:
ipse ad hostem vehitur,
Nep. Dat. 4, 5; id. Dion. 5, 4: Romulus ad regem impetus facit (a phrase in which in is commonly found), Liv. 1, 5, 7, and 44, 3, 10:
aliquem ad hostem ducere,
Tac. A. 2, 52:
clipeos ad tela protecti obiciunt,
Verg. A. 2, 443:
munio me ad haec tempora,
Cic. Fam. 9, 18:
ad hos omnes casus provisa erant praesidia,
Caes. B. G. 7, 65; 7, 41;
so with nouns: medicamentum ad aquam intercutem,
Cic. Off. 3, 24:
remedium ad tertianam,
Petr. Sat. 18:
munimen ad imbris,
Verg. G. 2, 352:
farina cum melle ad tussim siccam efficasissima est,
Plin. 20, 22, 89, § 243:
ad muliebre ingenium efficaces preces,
Liv. 1, 9; 1, 19 (in these two passages ad may have the force of apud, Hand).—
(η).
The repetition of ad to denote the direction to a place and to a person present in it is rare:
nunc tu abi ad forum ad herum,
Plaut. As. 2, 2, 100; cf.:
vocatis classico ad concilium militibus ad tribunos,
Liv. 5 47.—(The distinction between ad and in is given by Diom. 409 P., thus: in forum ire est in ipsum forum intrare; ad forum autem ire, in locum foro proximum; ut in tribunal et ad tribunal venire non unum est; quia ad tribunal venit litigator, in tribunal vero praetor aut judex; cf. also Sen. Ep. 73, 14, deus ad homines venit, immo, quod propius est, in homines venit.)—
b.
The terminus, with ref. to the space traversed, to, even to, with or without usque, Quint. 10, 7, 16: ingurgitavit usque ad imum gutturem, Naev. ap. Non. 207, 20 (Rib. Com. Rel. p. 30): dictator pervehitur usque ad oppidum, Naev. ap. Varr. L. L. 5, § 153 Mull. (B. Pun. p. 16 ed. Vahl.):
via pejor ad usque Baii moenia,
Hor. S. 1, 5, 96; 1, 1, 97:
rigidum permanat frigus ad ossa,
Lucr. 1, 355; 1, 969:
cum sudor ad imos Manaret talos,
Hor. S. 1, 9, 10:
ut quantum posset, agmen ad mare extenderet,
Curt. 3, 9, 10:
laeva pars ad pectus est nuda,
id. 6, 5, 27 al. —Hence the Plinian expression, petere aliquid (usque) ad aliquem, to seek something everywhere, even with one:
ut ad Aethiopas usque peteretur,
Plin. 36, 6, 9, § 51 (where Jan now reads ab Aethiopia); so,
vestis ad Seras peti,
id. 12, 1, 1.— Trop.:
si quid poscam, usque ad ravim poscam,
Plaut. Aul. 2, 5, 10:
deverberasse usque ad necem,
Ter. Phorm. 2, 2, 13;
without usque: hic ad incitas redactus,
Plaut. Trin. 2, 4, 136; 4, 2, 52; id. Poen. 4, 2, 85; illud ad incitas cum redit atque internecionem, Lucil. ap. Non. 123, 20:
virgis ad necem caedi,
Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 29, § 70; so Hor. S. 1, 2, 42; Liv. 24, 38, 9; Tac. A. 11, 37; Suet. Ner. 26; id. Dom. 8 al.
3.
Nearness or proximity in gen. = apud, near to, by, at, close by (in anteclass. per. very freq.; not rare later, esp. in the historians): pendent peniculamenta unum ad quemque pedum, trains are suspended at each foot, Enn. ap. Non. 149, 33 (Ann. v. 363 ed. Vahl.):
ut in servitute hic ad suum maneat patrem,
Plaut. Capt. prol. 49; cf. id. ib. 2, 3, 98;
3, 5, 41: sol quasi flagitator astat usque ad ostium,
stands like a creditor continually at the door, id. Most. 3, 2, 81 (cf. with same force, Att. ap. Non. 522, 25;
apud ipsum astas): ad foris adsistere,
Cic. Verr. 1, 66; id. Arch. 24:
astiterunt ad januam,
Vulg. Act. 10, 17:
non adest ad exercitum,
Plaut. Am. 1, 3, 6; cf. ib. prol. 133:
aderant ad spectaculum istud,
Vulg. Luc. 23, 48: has (testas) e fenestris in caput Deiciunt, qui prope ad ostium adspiraverunt, Lucil. ap. Non. 288, 31:
et nec opinanti Mors ad caput adstitit,
Lucr. 3, 959:
quod Romanis ad manum domi supplementum esset,
at hand, Liv. 9, 19, 6:
haec arma habere ad manum,
Quint. 12, 5, 1:
dominum esse ad villam,
Cic. Sull. 20; so id. Verr. 2, 21:
errantem ad flumina,
Verg. E. 6, 64; Tib. 1, 10, 38; Plin. 7, 2, § 12; Vitr. 7, 14; 7, 12; and ellipt. (cf. supra, 2. g):
pecunia utinam ad Opis maneret!
Cic. Phil. 1, 17.—Even of persons:
qui primum pilum ad Caesarem duxerat (for apud),
Caes. B. G. 6, 38; so id. ib. 1, 31; 3, 9; 5, 53; 7, 5; id. B. C. 3, 60:
ad inferos poenas parricidii luent,
among, Cic. Phil. 14, 13:
neque segnius ad hostes bellum apparatur,
Liv. 7, 7, 4: pugna ad Trebiam, ad Trasimenum, ad Cannas, etc., for which Liv. also uses the gen.:
si Trasimeni quam Trebiae, si Cannarum quam Trasimeni pugna nobilior esset, 23, 43, 4.—Sometimes used to form the name of a place, although written separately, e. g. ad Murcim,
Varr. L. L. 5, § 154:
villa ad Gallinas, a villa on the Flaminian Way,
Plin. 15, 30, 40, § 37: ad urbem esse (of generals), to remain outside the city (Rome) until permission was given for a triumph:
“Esse ad urbem dicebantur, qui cum potestate provinciali aut nuper e provincia revertissent, aut nondum in provinciam profecti essent... solebant autem, qui ob res in provincia gestas triumphum peterent, extra urbem exspectare, donec, lege lata, triumphantes urbem introire possent,”
Manut. ad Cic. Fam. 3, 8.—So sometimes with names of towns and verbs of rest:
pons, qui erat ad Genavam,
Caes. B. G. 1, 7:
ad Tibur mortem patri minatus est,
Cic. Phil. 6, 4, 10:
conchas ad Caietam legunt,
id. Or. 2, 6:
ad forum esse,
to be at the market, Plaut. Ps. 4, 7, 136; id. Most. 3, 2, 158; cf. Ter. Ph. 4, 2, 8; id. And. 1, 5, 19.—Hence, adverb., ad dextram (sc. manum, partem), ad laevam, ad sinistram, to the right, to the left, or on the right, on the left:
ad dextram,
Att. Rib. Trag. Rel. p. 225; Plaut. Poen. 3, 4, 1; Ter. Ad. 4, 2, 44; Cic. Univ. 13; Caes. B. C. 1, 69:
ad laevam,
Enn. Rib. Trag. Rel. p. 51; Att. ib. p. 217: ad sinistram, Ter. [p. 28] Ad. 4, 2, 43 al.:
ad dextram... ad laevam,
Liv. 40, 6;
and with an ordinal number: cum plebes ad tertium milliarium consedisset,
at the third milestone, Cic. Brut. 14, 54, esp. freq. with lapis:
sepultus ad quintum lapidem,
Nep. Att. 22, 4; so Liv. 3, 69 al.; Tac. H. 3, 18; 4, 60 (with apud, Ann. 1, 45; 3, 45; 15, 60) al.; cf. Rudd. II. p. 287.
B.
In time, analogous to the relations given in A.
1.
Direction toward, i. e. approach to a definite point of time, about, toward:
domum reductus ad vesperum,
toward evening, Cic. Lael. 3, 12:
cum ad hiemem me ex Cilicia recepissem,
toward winter, id. Fam. 3, 7.—
2.
The limit or boundary to which a space of time extends, with and without usque, till, until, to, even to, up to:
ego ad illud frugi usque et probus fui,
Plaut. Most. 1, 2, 53:
philosophia jacuit usque ad hanc aetatem,
Cic. Tusc. 1, 3, 5; id. de Sen. 14:
quid si hic manebo potius ad meridiem,
Plaut. Most. 3, 1, 55; so id. Men. 5, 7, 33; id. Ps. 1, 5, 116; id. As. 2, 1, 5:
ad multam noctem,
Cic. de Sen. 14:
Sophocles ad summam senectutem tragoedias fecit,
id. ib. 2; cf. id. Rep. 1, 1:
Alexandream se proficisci velle dixit (Aratus) remque integram ad reditum suum jussit esse,
id. Off. 2, 23, 82:
bestiae ex se natos amant ad quoddam tempus,
id. Lael. 8; so id. de Sen. 6; id. Somn. Sc. 1 al. —And with ab or ab-usque, to desig. the whole period of time passed away:
ab hora octava ad vesperum secreto collocuti sumus,
Cic. Att. 7, 8:
usque ab aurora ad hoc diei,
Plaut. Poen. 1, 2, 8.—
3.
Coincidence with a point of time, at, on, in, by:
praesto fuit ad horam destinatam,
at the appointed hour, Cic. Tusc. 5, 22:
admonuit ut pecuniam ad diem solverent,
on the day of payment, id. Att. 16, 16 A:
nostra ad diem dictam fient,
id. Fam. 16, 10, 4; cf. id. Verr. 2, 2, 5: ad lucem denique arte et graviter dormitare coepisse, at (not toward) daybreak, id. Div. 1, 28, 59; so id. Att. 1, 3, 2; 1, 4, 3; id. Fin. 2, 31, 103; id. Brut. 97, 313:
ad id tempus,
Caes. B. C. 1, 24; Sall. J. 70, 5; Tac. A. 15, 60; Suet. Aug. 87; Domit. 17, 21 al.
C.
The relations of number.
1.
An approximation to a sum designated, near, near to, almost, about, toward (cf. Gr. epi, pros with acc. and the Fr. pres de, a peu pres, presque) = circiter (Hand, Turs. I. p. 102):
ad quadraginta eam posse emi minas,
Plaut. Ep. 2, 2, 111:
nummorum Philippum ad tria milia,
id. Trin. 1, 2, 115; sometimes with quasi added:
quasi ad quadraginta minas,
as it were about, id. Most. 3, 1, 95; so Ter. Heaut. 1, 1, 93:
sane frequentes fuimus omnino ad ducentos,
Cic. Q. Fr. 2, 1:
cum annos ad quadraginta natus esset,
id. Clu. 40, 110:
ad hominum milia decem,
Caes. B. G. 1, 4:
oppida numero ad duodecim, vicos ad quadringentos,
id. ib. 1, 5.—In the histt. and post-Aug. authors ad is added adverbially in this sense (contrary to Gr. usage, by which amphi, peri, and eis with numerals retain their power as prepositions): ad binum milium numero utrinque sauciis factis, Sisenn. ap. Non. 80, 4:
occisis ad hominum milibus quattuor,
Caes. B. G. 2, 33:
ad duorum milium numero ceciderunt,
id. B. C. 3, 53:
ad duo milia et trecenti occisi,
Liv. 10, 17, 8; so id. 27, 12, 16; Suet. Caes. 20; cf. Rudd. II. p. 334.—
2.
The terminus, the limit, to, unto, even to, a designated number (rare):
ranam luridam conicere in aquam usque quo ad tertiam partem decoxeris,
Varr. R. R. 1, 2, 26; cf. App. Herb. 41:
aedem Junonis ad partem dimidiam detegit,
even to the half, Liv. 42, 3, 2:
miles (viaticum) ad assem perdiderat,
to a farthing, to the last farthing, Hor. Ep. 2, 2, 27; Plin. Ep. 1, 15:
quid ad denarium solveretur,
Cic. Quint. 4.—The phrase omnes ad unum or ad unum omnes, or simply ad unum, means lit. all to one, i. e. all together, all without exception; Gr. hoi kath hena pantes (therefore the gender of unum is changed according to that of omnes): praetor omnes extra castra, ut stercus, foras ejecit ad unum, Lucil. ap. Non. 394, 22:
de amicitia omnes ad unum idem sentiunt,
Cic. Lael. 23:
ad unum omnes cum ipso duce occisi sunt,
Curt. 4, 1, 22 al.:
naves Rhodias afflixit ita, ut ad unam omnes constratae eliderentur,
Caes. B. C. 3, 27; onerariae omnes ad unam a nobis sunt exceptae, Cic. Fam. 12, 14 (cf. in Gr. hoi kath hena; in Hebr., Exod. 14, 28).— Ad unum without omnes:
ego eam sententiam dixi, cui sunt assensi ad unum,
Cic. Fam. 10, 16:
Juppiter omnipotens si nondum exosus ad unum Trojanos,
Verg. A. 5, 687.
D.
In the manifold relations of one object to another.
1.
That in respect of or in regard to which a thing avails, happens, or is true or important, with regard to, in respect of, in relation to, as to, to, in.
a.
With verbs:
ad omnia alia aetate sapimus rectius,
in respect to all other things we grow wiser by age, Ter. Ad. 5, 3, 45:
numquam ita quisquam bene ad vitam fuat,
id. ib. 5, 4, 1:
nil ibi libatum de toto corpore (mortui) cernas ad speciem, nil ad pondus,
that nothing is lost in form or weight, Lucr. 3, 214; cf. id. 5, 570; Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 21, § 58; id. Mur. 13, 29: illi regi Cyro subest, ad immutandi animi licentiam, crudelissimus ille Phalaris, in that Cyrus, in regard to the liberty of changing his disposition (i. e. not in reality, but inasmuch as he is at liberty to lay aside his good character, and assume that of a tyrant), there is concealed another cruel Phalaris, Cic. Rep. 1, 28:
nil est ad nos,
is nothing to us, concerns us not, Lucr. 3, 830; 3, 845:
nil ad me attinet,
Ter. Ad. 1, 2, 54:
nihil ad rem pertinet,
Cic. Caecin. 58;
and in the same sense elliptically: nihil ad Epicurum,
id. Fin. 1, 2, 5; id. Pis. 68:
Quid ad praetorem?
id. Verr. 1, 116 (this usage is not to be confounded with that under 4.).—
b.
With adjectives:
ad has res perspicax,
Ter. Heaut. 2, 3, 129:
virum ad cetera egregium,
Liv. 37, 7, 15:
auxiliaribus ad pugnam non multum Crassus confidebat,
Caes. B. G. 3, 25:
ejus frater aliquantum ad rem est avidior,
Ter. Eun. 1, 2, 51; cf. id. And. 1, 2, 21; id. Heaut. 2, 3, 129:
ut sit potior, qui prior ad dandum est,
id. Phorm. 3, 2, 48:
difficilis (res) ad credendum,
Lucr. 2, 1027:
ad rationem sollertiamque praestantior,
Cic. N. D. 2, 62; so id. Leg. 2, 13, 33; id. Fin. 2, 20, 63; id. Rosc. Am. 30, 85; id. Font. 15; id. Cat. 1, 5, 12; id. de Or. 1, 25, 113; 1, 32, 146; 2, 49, 200; id. Fam. 3, 1, 1; Liv. 9, 16, 13; Tac. A. 12, 54 al.—
c.
With nouns:
prius quam tuum, ut sese habeat, animum ad nuptias perspexerit,
before he knew your feeling in regard to the marriage, Ter. And. 2, 3, 4 (cf. Gr. hopôs echei tis pros ti):
mentis ad omnia caecitas,
Cic. Tusc. 3, 5, 11:
magna vis est fortunae in utramque partem vel ad secundas res vel ad adversas,
id. Off. 2, 6; so id. Par. 1:
ad cetera paene gemelli,
Hor. Ep. 1, 10, 3.—So with acc. of gerund instead of the gen. from the same vb.:
facultas ad scribendum, instead of scribendi,
Cic. Font. 6;
facultas ad agendum,
id. de Imp. Pomp. 1, 2: cf. Rudd. II. p. 245.—
d.
In gramm.: nomina ad aliquid dicta, nouns used in relation to something, i. e. which derive their significance from their relation to another object: quae non possunt intellegi sola, ut pater, mater;
jungunt enim sibi et illa propter quae intelleguntur,
Charis. 129 P.; cf. Prisc. 580 ib.—
2.
With words denoting measure, weight, manner, model, rule, etc., both prop. and fig., according to, agreeably to, after (Gr. kata, pros):
columnas ad perpendiculum exigere,
Cic. Mur. 77:
taleis ferreis ad certum pondus examinatis,
Caes. B. G. 5, 12: facta sunt ad certam formam. Lucr. 2, 379:
ad amussim non est numerus,
Varr. 2, 1, 26:
ad imaginem facere,
Vulg. Gen. 1, 26:
ad cursus lunae describit annum,
Liv. 1, 19:
omnia ad diem facta sunt,
Caes. B. G. 2, 5:
Id ad similitudinem panis efficiebant,
id. B. C. 3, 48; Vulg. Gen. 1, 26; id. Jac. 3, 9:
ad aequos flexus,
at equal angles, Lucr. 4, 323: quasi ad tornum levantur, to or by the lathe, id. 4, 361:
turres ad altitudiem valli,
Caes. B. G. 5, 42; Liv. 39, 6:
ad eandem crassitudinem structi,
id. 44, 11:
ad speciem cancellorum scenicorum,
with the appearance of, like, Varr. R. R. 3, 5, 8:
stagnum maris instar, circumseptum aedificiis ad urbium speciem,
Suet. Ner. 31:
lascivum pecus ludens ad cantum,
Liv. Andron. Rib. Trag. Rel. p. 1:
canere ad tibiam,
Cic. Tusc. 4, 2: canere ad tibicinem, id. ib. 1, 2 (cf.:
in numerum ludere,
Verg. E. 6, 28; id. G. 4, 175):
quod ad Aristophanis lucernam lucubravi,
Varr. L. L. 5, § 9 Mull.: carmen castigare ad unguem, to perfection (v. unguis), Hor. A. P. 294:
ad unguem factus homo,
a perfect gentleman, id. S. 1, 5, 32 (cf. id. ib. 2, 7, 86):
ad istorum normam sapientes,
Cic. Lael. 5, 18; id. Mur. 3:
Cyrus non ad historiae fidem scriptus, sed ad effigiem justi imperii,
id. Q. Fr. 1, 1, 8:
exercemur in venando ad similitudinem bellicae disciplinae,
id. N. D. 2, 64, 161: so,
ad simulacrum,
Liv. 40, 6:
ad Punica ingenia,
id. 21, 22:
ad L. Crassi eloquentiam,
Cic. Var. Fragm. 8:
omnia fient ad verum,
Juv. 6, 324:
quid aut ad naturam aut contra sit,
Cic. Fin. 1, 9, 30:
ad hunc modum institutus est,
id. Tusc. 2, 3; Caes. B. G. 2, 31; 3, 13:
ad eundem istunc modum,
Ter. Ad. 3, 3, 70:
quem ad modum, q. v.: ad istam faciem est morbus, qui me macerat,
of that kind, Plaut. Cist. 1, 1, 73; id. Merc. 2, 3, 90; cf.
91: cujus ad arbitrium copia materiai cogitur,
Lucr. 2, 281:
ad eorum arbitrium et nutum totos se fingunt,
to their will and pleasure, Cic. Or. 8, 24; id. Quint. 71:
ad P. Lentuli auctoritatem Roma contendit,
id. Rab. Post. 21:
aliae sunt legati partes, aliae imperatoris: alter omnia agere ad praescriptum, alter libere ad summam rerum consulere debet,
Caes. B. C. 3, 51:
rebus ad voluntatem nostram fluentibus,
Cic. Off. 1, 26:
rem ad illorum libidinem judicarunt,
id. Font. 36:
ad vulgi opinionem,
id. Off. 3, 21.—So in later Lat. with instar:
ad instar castrorum,
Just. 36, 3, 2:
scoparum,
App. M. 9, p. 232:
speculi,
id. ib. 2, p. 118: ad hoc instar mundi, id. de Mundo, p. 72.—Sometimes, but very rarely, ad is used absol. in this sense (so also very rarely kata with acc., Xen. Hell. 2, 3; Luc. Dial. Deor. 8): convertier ad nos, as we (are turned), Lucr. 4, 317:
ad navis feratur,
like ships, id. 4, 897 Munro. —With noun:
ad specus angustiac vallium,
like caves, Caes. B. C. 3, 49.—Hence,
3.
With an object which is the cause or reason, in conformity to which, from which, or for which, any thing is or is done.
a.
The moving cause, according to, at, on, in consequence of:
cetera pars animae paret et ad numen mentis momenque movetur,
Lucr. 3, 144:
ad horum preces in Boeotiam duxit,
on their entreaty, Liv. 42, 67, 12: ad ea Caesar veniam ipsique et conjugi et fratribus tribuit, in consequence of or upon this, he, etc., Tac. Ann. 12, 37.—
b.
The final cause, or the object, end, or aim, for the attainment of which any thing,
(α).
is done,
(β).
is designed, or,
(γ).
is fitted or adapted (very freq.), to, for, in order to.
(α).
Seque ad ludos jam inde abhinc exerceant, Pac. ap. Charis. p. 175 P. (Rib. Trag. Rel. p. 80):
venimus coctum ad nuptias,
in order to cook for the wedding, Plaut. Aul. 3, 2, 15:
omnis ad perniciem instructa domus,
id. Bacch. 3, 1, 6; cf. Ter. Heaut. 3, 1, 41; Liv. 1, 54:
cum fingis falsas causas ad discordiam,
in order to produce dissension, Ter. Hec. 4, 4, 71:
quantam fenestram ad nequitiam patefeceris,
id. Heaut. 3, 1, 72:
utrum ille, qui postulat legatum ad tantum bellum, quem velit, idoneus non est, qui impetret, cum ceteri ad expilandos socios diripiendasque provincias, quos voluerunt, legatos eduxerint,
Cic. de Imp. Pomp. 19, 57:
ego vitam quoad putabo tua interesse, aut ad spem servandam esse, retinebo,
for hope, id. Q. Fr. 1, 4; id. Fam. 5, 17:
haec juventutem, ubi familiares opes defecerant, ad facinora incendebant,
Sall. C. 13, 4:
ad speciem atque ad usurpationem vetustatis,
Cic. Agr. 2, 12, 31; Suet. Caes. 67:
paucis ad speciem tabernaculis relictis,
for appearance, Caes. B. C. 2, 35; so id. ib. 2, 41; id. B. G. 1, 51.—
(β).
Aut equos alere aut canes ad venandum. Ter. And. 1, 1, 30:
ingenio egregie ad miseriam natus sum,
id. Heaut. 3, 1, 11;
(in the same sense: in rem,
Hor. C. 1, 27, 1, and the dat., Ter. Ad. 4, 2, 6):
ad cursum equum, ad arandum bovem, ad indagandum canem,
Cic. Fin. 2, 13, 40:
ad frena leones,
Verg. A. 10, 253:
delecto ad naves milite,
marines, Liv. 22, 19 Weissenb.:
servos ad remum,
rowers, id. 34, 6; and:
servos ad militiam emendos,
id. 22, 61, 2:
comparasti ad lecticam homines,
Cat. 10, 16:
Lygdamus ad cyathos,
Prop. 4, 8, 37; cf.:
puer ad cyathum statuetur,
Hor. C. 1, 29, 8.—
(γ).
Quae oportet Signa esse [p. 29] ad salutem, omnia huic osse video, everything indicative of prosperity I see in him, Ter. And. 3, 2, 2:
haec sunt ad virtutem omnia,
id. Heaut. 1, 2, 33:
causa ad objurgandum,
id. And. 1, 1, 123:
argumentum ad scribendum,
Cic. Att. 9, 7 (in both examples instead of the gen. of gerund., cf. Rudd. II. p. 245):
vinum murteum est ad alvum crudam,
Cato R. R. 125:
nulla res tantum ad dicendum proficit, quantum scriptio,
Cic. Brut. 24:
reliquis rebus, quae sunt ad incendia,
Caes. B. C. 3, 101 al. —So with the adjectives idoneus, utilis, aptus, instead of the dat.:
homines ad hanc rem idoneos,
Plaut. Poen. 3, 2, 6:
calcei habiles et apti ad pedem,
Cic. de Or. 1, 54, 231:
orator aptus tamen ad dicendum,
id. Tusc. 1, 3, 5:
sus est ad vescendum hominibus apta,
id. N. D. 2, 64, 160:
homo ad nullam rem utilis,
id. Off. 3, 6:
ad segetes ingeniosus ager,
Ov. F. 4, 684.—(Upon the connection of ad with the gerund. v. Zumpt, § 666; Rudd. II. p. 261.)—
4.
Comparison (since that with which a thing is compared is considered as an object to which the thing compared is brought near for the sake of comparison), to, compared to or with, in comparison with:
ad sapientiam hujus ille (Thales) nimius nugator fuit,
Plaut. Capt. 2, 2, 25; id. Trin. 3, 2, 100:
ne comparandus hic quidem ad illum'st,
Ter. Eun. 4, 4, 14; 2, 3, 69:
terra ad universi caeli complexum,
compared with the whole extent of the heavens, Cic. Tusc. 1, 17, 40:
homini non ad cetera Punica ingenia callido,
Liv. 22, 22, 15:
at nihil ad nostram hanc,
nothing in comparison with, Ter. Eun. 2, 3, 70; so Cic. Deiot. 8, 24; and id. de Or. 2, 6, 25.
E.
Adverbial phrases with ad.
1.
Ad omnia, withal, to crown all:
ingentem vim peditum equitumque venire: ex India elephantos: ad omnia tantum advehi auri, etc.,
Liv. 35, 32, 4.—
2.
Ad hoc and ad haec (in the historians, esp. from the time of Livy, and in authors after the Aug. per.), = praeterea, insuper, moreover, besides, in addition, epi toutois:
nam quicumque impudicus, adulter, ganeo, etc.: praeterea omnes undique parricidae, etc.: ad hoc, quos manus atque lingua perjurio aut sanguine civili alebat: postremo omnes, quos, etc.,
Sall. C. 14, 2 and 3:
his opinionibus inflato animo, ad hoc vitio quoque ingenii vehemens,
Liv. 6, 11, 6; 42, 1, 1; Tac. H. 1, 6; Suet. Aug. 22 al.—
3.
Ad id quod, beside that (very rare):
ad id quod sua sponte satis conlectum animorum erat, indignitate etiam Romani accendebantur,
Liv. 3, 62, 1; so 44, 37, 12.—
4.
Ad tempus.
a.
At a definite, fixed time, Cic. Att. 13, 45; Liv. 38, 25, 3.—
b.
At a fit, appropriate time, Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 54, § 141; Liv. 1, 7, 13.—
c.
For some time, for a short time, Cic. Off. 1, 8, 27; id. Lael. 15, 53; Liv. 21, 25, 14.—
d.
According to circumstances, Cic. Planc. 30, 74; id. Cael. 6, 13; Planc. ap. Cic. Fam. 10, 9.—
5.
Ad praesens (for the most part only in post-Aug. writers).
a.
For the moment, for a short time, Cic. Fam. 12, 8; Plin. 8, 22, 34; Tac. A. 4, 21.—
b.
At present, now, Tac. A. 16, 5; id. H. 1, 44.—So, ad praesentiam, Tac. A. 11, 8.—
6.
Ad locum, on the spot:
ut ad locum miles esset paratus,
Liv. 27, 27, 2.—
7.
Ad verbum, word for word, literally, Cic. Fin. 1, 2, 4; id. de Or. 1, 34, 157; id. Ac. 2, 44, 135 al.—
8.
Ad summam.
a.
On the whole, generally, in general, Cic. Fam. 14, 14, 3; id. Att. 14, 1; Suet. Aug. 71.—
b.
In a word, in short, Cic. Off. 1, 41, 149; Hor. Ep. 1, 1, 106. —
9.
Ad extremum, ad ultimum, ad postremum.
a.
At the end, finally, at last.
(α).
Of place, at the extremity, extreme point, top, etc.:
missile telum hastili abiegno et cetera tereti, praeterquam ad extremum, unde ferrum exstabat,
Liv. 21, 8, 10.—
(β).
Of time = telos de, at last, finally:
ibi ad postremum cedit miles,
Plaut. Aul. 3, 5, 52; so id. Poen. 4, 2, 22; Cic. Off. 3, 23, 89; id. Phil. 13, 20, 45; Caes. B. G. 7, 53; Liv. 30, 15, 4 al.— Hence,
(γ).
of order, finally, lastly, = denique: inventa componere; tum ornare oratione; post memoria sepire;
ad extremum agere cum dignitate,
Cic. de Or. 1, 31, 142.—
b.
In Liv., to the last degree, quite: improbus homo, sed non ad extremum perditus, 23, 2, 3; cf.:
consilii scelerati, sed non ad ultimum dementis,
id. 28, 28, 8.—
10.
Quem ad finem? To what limit? How far? Cic. Cat. 1, 1; id. Verr. 5, 75.—
11.
Quem ad modum, v. sub h. v.
► a.
Ad (v. ab, ex, in, etc.) is not repeated like some other prepositions with interrog. and relative pronouns, after nouns or demonstrative pronouns:
traducis cogitationes meas ad voluptates. Quas? corporis credo,
Cic. Tusc. 3, 17, 37 (ubi v. Kuhner).—
b.
Ad is sometimes placed after its substantive:
quam ad,
Ter. Phorm. 3, 2, 39:
senatus, quos ad soleret, referendum censuit,
Cic. N. D. 2, 4:
ripam ad Araxis,
Tac. Ann. 12, 51;
or between subst. and adj.: augendam ad invidiam,
id. ib. 12, 8.—
c.
The compound adque for et ad (like exque, eque, and, poet., aque) is denied by Moser, Cic. Rep. 2, 15, p. 248, and he reads instead of ad humanitatem adque mansuetudinem of the MSS., hum. atque mans. But adque, in acc. with later usage, is restored by Hand in App. M. 10, p. 247, adque haec omnia oboediebam for atque; and in Plaut. Capt. 2, 3, 9, utroque vorsum rectum'st ingenium meum, ad se adque illum, is now read, ad te atque ad illum (Fleck., Brix).
II.
In composition.
A.
Form. According to the usual orthography, the d of the ad remains unchanged before vowels, and before b, d, h, m, v: adbibo, adduco, adhibeo, admoveo, advenio; it is assimilated to c, f, g, l, n, p, r, s, t: accipio, affigo, aggero, allabor, annumero, appello, arripio, assumo, attineo; before g and s it sometimes disappears: agnosco, aspicio, asto: and before qu it passes into c: acquiro, acquiesco.—But later philologists, supported by old inscriptions and good MSS., have mostly adopted the following forms: ad before j, h, b, d, f, m, n, q, v; ac before c, sometimes, but less well, before q; ag and also ad before g; a before gn, sp, sc, st; ad and also al before l; ad rather than an before n; ap and sometimes ad before p; ad and also ar before r; ad and also as before s; at and sometimes ad before t. In this work the old orthography has commonly been retained for the sake of convenient reference, but the better form in any case is indicated.—
B.
Signif. In English up often denotes approach, and in many instances will give the force of ad as a prefix both in its local and in its figurative sense.
1.
Local.
a.
To, toward: affero, accurro, accipio ( to one's self).—
b.
At, by: astare, adesse.—
c.
On, upon, against: accumbo, attero.—
d.
Up (cf. de- = down, as in deicio, decido): attollo, ascendo, adsurgo.—
2.
Fig.
a.
To: adjudico, adsentior.—
b.
At or on: admiror, adludo.—
c.
Denoting conformity to, or comparison with: affiguro, adaequo.—
d.
Denoting addition, increase (cf. ab, de, and ex as prefixes to denote privation): addoceo, adposco.—
e.
Hence, denoting intensity: adamo, adimpleo, aduro, and perhaps agnosco.—
f.
Denoting the coming to an act or state, and hence commencement: addubito, addormio, adquiesco, adlubesco, advesperascit. See more upon this word in Hand, Turs. I. pp. 74-134.

Lewis & Short latin dictionary > ad
9 AF

of

* * *

prep. w. dat.

I. Of place:

1) off, from;

G. hljóp af hesti sínum, G. jumped off his horse;

ganga af mótinu, to go away from the meeting;

Flosi kastaði af sér skikkjunni, threw off his cloak;

Gizzur gekk af útsuðri at gerðinu, from the south-west;

hann hafði leyst af sér skúa sína, he had taken off his shoes;

Steinarr vildi slíta hann af sér, throw him off;

tók Gísli þá af sér vápnin, took off his arms;

bréf af Magnúsi konungi, a letter from king Magnus;

land af landi, from one land to the other;

hverr af öðrum, one after another, in succession;

vil ek þú vinnir af þér skuldina, work off the debt;

muntu enga sætt af mér fá, no peace at my hand;

rísa af dauða, to rise from the dead;

vakna af draumi, to awaken from a dream;

lúka upp af hrossi, to open a gate from off a horse;

vindr stóð af landi, the wind blew from the land;

2) out of;

verða tekinn af heimi, to be taken out of the world;

gruflar hón af læknum, she scrambles out of the brook;

Otradalr var mjök af vegi, far out of the way.

Connected with út; föstudaginn fór út herrinn af borginni, marched out of the town.

II. Of time; past, beyond:

af ómagaaldri, able to support oneself, of age;

ek em nú af léttasta skeiði, no longer in the prime of life;

þá er sjau vikur eru af sumri, when seven weeks of summer are past;

var mikit af nótt, much of the night was past.

III. In various other relations:

1) þiggja lið af e-m, to receive help from one;

hafa umboð af e-m, to be another’s deputy;

vera góðs (ills) maklegr af e-m, to deserve good (bad) of one;

féll þar lið mart af Eyvindi, many of Eyvind’s men fell there;

þá eru þeir útlagir ok af goðorði sínu, have forfeited their goðorð;

þá skalt þú af allri fjárheimtunni, forfeit all the claim;

ek skal stefna þér af konunni, summon thee to give up;

2) off, of;

höggva fót, hönd, af e-m, to cut off one’s foot, hand;

vil ek, at þú takir slíkt sem þér líkar af varningi, whatever you like of the stores;

þar lá forkr einn ok brotit af endanum, with the point broken off;

absol., beit hann höndina af, bit the hand off;

fauk af höfuðit, the head flew off;

3) of, among;

hinn efniligasti maðr af ungum mönnum, the most promising of the young men;

4) with;

hláða, (ferma) skip af e-u, to load (freight) a ship with;

fylla heiminn af sínu kyni, to fill the world with his offspring;

5) of (= ór which is more frequent);

húsit var gert af timbr stokkum, was built of trunks of trees;

6) fig., eigi vita menn hvat af honum er orðit, what has become of him;

hvat hefir þú gert af Gunnari, what hast thou done with Gunnar?;

7) denoting parentage, descent, origin;

ok eru af þeim komnir Gilsbekkingar, are descended from them;

kominn af Trójumönnum, descended from the Trojans;

8) by, of (after passive);

ek em sendr hingat af Starkaði, sent hither by;

ástsæll af landsmónnum, beloved of;

9) on account of, by reason of, by;

úbygðr at frosti ok kulda, because of frost and cold;

ómáli af áverkum, speechless from wounds;

af ástæld hans, by his popularity;

af því, therefore;

af hví, wherefor why;

af því at, because;

10) by means of, by;

framfœra e-n af verkum sínum, by means of his own labour;

af sínu fé, by one’s own means;

absol., hann fekk af hina mestu sœmd, derived great honour from it;

11) with adjectives, in regard to;

mildr af fé, liberal of money;

góðr af griðum, merciful;

fastr af drykk, close (stingy) in regard to drink;

12) used absol. with a verb, off away;

hann bað hann þá róa af fjörðinn, to row the firth off;

ok er þeir höfðu af fjörðung, when they had covered one forth of the way;

sofa af nóttina, to sleep the night away.

* * *

prep. often used elliptically by dropping the case, or even merely adverbially, [Ulf. af; A. S. and Engl. of, off; Hel. ab; Germ. ab; Gr. άπό; Lat. a, ab.] With dat. denoting a motion a loco; one of the three prepp. af, ór, frá, corresponding to those in loco—á, í, við, and ad locum—á, í, at. It in general corresponds to the prepp. in loco—á, or in locum— til, whilst ór answers more to í; but it also frequently corresponds to yfir, um or í. It ranges between ór and frá, generally denoting the idea from the surface of, while ór means from the inner part, and frá from the outer part or border. The motion from a hill, plain, open place is thus denoted by af; by ór that from an enclosed space, depth, cavity, thus af fjalli, but ór of a valley, dale; af Englandi, but ór Danmörk, as mörk implies the notion of a deep wood, forest. The wind blows af landi, but a ship sets sail frá landi; frá landi also means a distance from: af hendi, of a glove, ring; ór hendi, of whatever has been kept in the hand (correl. to á hendi and í hendi). On the other hand af is more general, whilst frá and ór are of a more special character; frá denoting a departure, ór an impulse or force; a member goes home af þingi, whereas ór may denote an inmate of a district, or convey the notion of secession or exclusion from, Eb. 105 new Ed.; the traveller goes af landi, the exile ór landi: taka e-t af e-m is to take a thing out of one’s hand, that of taka frá e-m to remove out of one’s sight, etc. In general af answers to Engl. of, off, ór to out of, and frá to from: the Lat. prepp. ab, de, and ex do not exactly correspond to the Icelandic, yet as a rule ór may answer to ex, af sometimes to ab, sometimes to de. Of, off, from among; with, by; on account of by means of, because of concerning, in respect of.

A. Loc.

I. With motion, off, from:

1. prop. corresp. to á,

α. konungr dró gullhring af hendi sér (but á hendi), Ld. 32; Höskuldr lætr bera farm af skipi, unload the ship (but bera farm á skip), id.; var tekit af hestum þeirra, they were unsaddled, Nj. 4; Gunnarr hafði farit heiman af bæ sínum, he was away from home, 82; Gunnarr hljóp af hesti sínum, jumped off his horse (but hl. á hest), 83; hlaupa, stökkva af baki, id., 112, 264 ; Gunnarr skýtr til hans af boganum, from the bow, where af has a slight notion of instrumentality, 96; flýja af fundinum, to fly from off the battle-field, 102; ríða af Þríhyrningshálsum, 206; út af Langaholti, Eg. 744 ; sunnan ór Danmörk ok af Saxlandi, 560; ganga af mótinu, to go from the meeting, Fms. vii. 130; af þeirra fundi reis María upp ok fór, 625. 85 ; Flosi kastaði af ser skikkjunni, threw his cloak off him (but kasta á sik),Nj. 176; taka Hrungnis fót af honum, of a load, burden, Edda 58; land þat er hann fiskði af, from which he set off to fish, Grág. i. 151, is irregular, frá would suit better; slíta af baki e-s, from off one’s back, ii. 9 ; bera af borði, to clear the table, Nj. 75.

β. where it more nearly answers to í; þeir koma af hafi, of sailors coming in (but leggja í haf), Nj. 128 ; fara til Noregs af Orkneyjum (but í or til O.), 131; þeim Agli fórst vel ok komu af hafi i Borgarfjörð, Eg. 392 ; hann var útlagi ( outlawed) af Noregi, where ór would be more regular, 344; af Islandi, of a traveller, Fms. x. 3; búa her af báðum ríkjunum, to take a levy from, 51; hinir beztu bændr ór Norðlendingafjórðungi ok af Sunnlendingafjórðungi, the most eminent Southerners and Northerners, 113; Gizzurr gékk af útsuðri at gerðinu, from south-west, Sturl. ii. 219; prestar af hvárutveggja biskupsdæmi, from either diocess, Dipl. ii. 11; verða tekinn af heimi, to be taken out of the world, 623. 21; gruflar hon af læknum, scrambles out of the brook, Ísl. ii. 340; Egill kneyfði af horninu í einum drykk, drained off the horn at one draught, literally squeezed every drop out of it, Eg. 557; brottuaf herbúðunurn, Fms. x. 343.

γ. of things more or less surrounding the subject, corresp. to yfir or um; láta þeir þegar af sér tjöldin, break off, take down the tents in preparing for battle, Eg. 261; kyrtillinn rifnaði af honum, his coat burst, caused by the swollen body, 602; hann hafði leyst af sér skúa sína, he untied his shoes (but binda á sik), 716; Steinarr vildi slíta hann af sér, throw him off, of one clinging to one’s body, 747; tók Gísli þá af sér vápnin, took off his arms, Fms. vii. 39. Of putting off clothes; fara af kápu, Nj. 143; far þú eigi af brynjunni, Bs. i. 541; þá ætlaði Sigurðr at fara af brynjunni, id.; þá var Skarphéðinn flettr af klæðunum, Nj. 209: now more usually fara or klæðum, fötum, exuere, to undress.

δ. connected with út; föstudaginn for út herrinn af borginni, marched out of the town, Nj. 274; ganga út af kirkjunni, to go out of the church, now út úr, Fms. vii. 107: drekki hann af þeirri jörðunni, of something impregnated with the earth, Laekn. 402.

ε. more closely corresponding to frá, being in such cases a Latinism (now frá); bréf af páfa, a pope’s bull, Fms. x. 6; rit af hánum, letter from him, 623. 52; bréf af Magnúsi konungi, a letter from king Magnus, Bs. i. 712; farið þér á brautu af mér í eilífan eld, Hom. 143; brott af drottins augliti, Stj. 43.

ζ. denoting an uninterrupted continuity, in such phrases as land aflandi, from land to land, Eg. 343, Fas. ii. 539; skip af skipl. from ship to ship, Fms. v. 10; brann hvat af öðru, one after another, of an increasing fire, destroying everything, i. 128; brandr af brandi brenn, funi kveykist af funa, one from another, Hm. 56; hverr af öðrum, one after another, in succession, also hverr at öðrum, Eb. 272, 280 (where at in both passages).

2. metaph., at ganga af e-m dauðum, to go from, leave one dead on the spot, of two combatants; en hann segiz bani hins ef hann gekk af dauðum manni, Grág. ii. 88, Hkr. 1. 327; undr þykir mér er bróðir þinn vildi eigi taka af þér starf þetta, would not take this toil from thee, Nj. 77; þegnar hans glöddust af honum, were fain of him, Fms. x. 380; at koma þeim manni af sér er settr var á fé hans, to get rid of, Ld. 52; vil ek þú vinriir af þér skuldina, work off the debt, Njarð. 366; reka af sér, to repel, Sturl. ii. 219; hann á þá sonu er aldri munu af oss ganga, who will never leave us, whom we shall never get rid of, Fas. i. 280; leysa e-n af e-u, to relieve, 64; taka e-n af lífi, to kill, Eg. 48, 416, Nj. 126; af lífdögum, Fms. vii. 204; ek mun ná lögum af því máli, get the benefit of the law in this case, Eg. 468; muntu enga sætt af mér fá, no peace at my hand, 414; rísa af dauða, to rise from death, Fms. ii. 142; guð bætti honum þó af þessi sótt, healed him of this sickness, ix. 390; vakna af sýn, draumi, svefni, to awaken from a vision, dream, sleep, 655 xxxii. I, Gísl. 24, Eb. 192, Fas. i. 41. Rather with the notion out of, in the phrase af sér etc., e. g. sýna e-t af scr, to shew, exhibit a disposition for or against, Ld. 18; gera mikit af sér, to shew great prowess, Ísl. ii. 368; éf þú gerir eigi meira af þér um aðra leika, unless you make more of thyself, Edda 32; Svipdagr hafði mikit af sér gert, fought bravely, Fas. i. 41; góðr (illr) af sér, good ( bad) of oneself, by nature; mikill af sjálfum sér, proud, bold, stout, Nj. 15; ágætastr maðr af sjálfum sér, the greatest hero, Bret.: góðr af ser, excellent, Hrafn. 7; but, on the contrary, af sér kominn, ruinous, in decay; this phrase is used of old houses or buildings, as in Bs. i. 488 = Sturl. l. c.; af sér kominn af mæði can also be said of a man fallen off from what he used to be; kominn af fotum fram, off his legs from age, Sturl. i. 223, Korm. 154 (in a verse).

II. WITHOUT MOTION:

1. denoting direction from, but at the same time continuous connection with an object from which an act or thing proceeds, from; tengja skip hvárt fram af stafni annars, to tie the ships in a line, stem to stern, Fms. i. 157, xi. 111; svá at þeir tóku út af borðum, jutted out of the boards, of rafters or poles, iv. 49; stjarna ok af sem skaft, of a comet, ix. 482; lúka upp af hrossi, to open a gate from off a horse, Grág. ii. 264; hon svarar af sínu sæti sem álpt af baru, Fás. i. 186; þar er sjá mátti utau af firði, af þjóðleið, that might be seen from the fareway on the sea when sailing in the firth, Hkr. ii. 64; þá mun hringt af (better at) Burakirkju, of bells rung at the church, Fms. xi. 160; gengr þar af Meðalfellsströnd, projects from, juts out, of a promontory, Ld. 10.

2. denoting direction alone; upp af víkinni stóð borg mikil, a burg inland from the inlet, Eg. 161; lokrekkja innar af seti, a shut bed inward from the benches in the hall, Ísl. ii. 262; kapella upp af konungs herbergjum, upwards from, Fms. x. 153; vindr stóð af landi, the wind stood off the land, Bárð. 166.

β. metaph., stauda af e-u, vide VI. 4.

γ. ellipt., hallaði af norðr, of the channel, north of a spot, Boll. 348; also, austr af, suðr af, vestr af, etc.

3. denoting absence; þingheyendr skulu eigi vera um nótt af þingi ( away from the meeting), eðr lengr, þá eru þeir af þingi ( away from (be meeting) ef þeir eru or ( out of) þingmarki, Grág. i. 25; vera um nótt af várþingi, 115; meðan hann er af landi héðan, abroad, 150.

β. metaph., gud hvíldi af öllum verkum sínum á sjaunda degi, rested from his labours, Ver. 3.

4. denoting distance; þat er komit af þjóðleið, out of the high road, remote, Eg. 369; af þjóðbraut, Grág. ii. 264, i. 15; Otradalr (a farm) var mjök af vegi, far out of the way, Háv. 53.

B. TEMP, past, from, out of, beyond:

1. of a person’s age, in the sense of having past a period of life; af ómaga aldri, of age, able to support oneself, Grág. i. 243; af aeskualdri, stricken in years, having past the prime of life, Eg. 202; lítið af barnsaldri, still a child, Ld. 74; ek em nú af léttasia skeiði, no longer in the prime of life, Háv. 40.

2. of a part or period of time, past; eigi síðar en nótt er af þingi, a night of the session past, Grág. i. 101; þá er sjau vikur eru af sumri, seven weeks past of the summer, 182; tíu vikur af sumri, Íb. 10; var mikit af nótt, much of the night was past, Háv. 41; mikið af vetri, much of the winter was past, Fas. ii. 186; þriðjungr af nótt, a third of the night past, Fms. x. 160; stund af degi, etc.; tveir mánoðr af sumri, Gþl. 103.

3. in adverbial phrases such as, af stundu, soon; af bragði, at once; af tómi, at leisure, at ease; af nýju, again; af skyndingu, speedily; af bráðungu, in a hurry, etc.

C. In various other relations:

I. denoting the passage or transition of an object, concrete or abstract, of, from.

1. where a thing is received, derived from, conferred by a person or object; þiggja lið af e-m, to derive help from, Edda 26; taka traust af e-m, to receive support, comfort from, Fms. xi. 243; taka mála af e-m, to be in one’s pay, of a soldier, Eg. 266; halda land af e-m, to hold land of any one, 282; verða viss af e-m, to get information from, 57, Nj. 130; taka við sök af manni (a law term), to undertake a case, suit, Grág. i. 142; hafa umboð af e-m, to be another’s deputy, ii. 374; vera góðs (ills) maklegr af e-m, to deserve good (bad) of, Vd. 88 (old Ed., the new reads frá), Fs. 45; afla matar af eyjum, to derive supplies from, Eb. 12.

2. where an object is taken by force:

α. prop. out of a person’s hand; þú skalt hnykkja smíðit af honum, wrest it out of his hand, Nj. 32; cp. taka, þrífa, svipta e-u (e-t) af e-m, to wrest from.

β. metaph. of a person’s deprival of anything in general; hann tók af þér konuna, carried thy wife off, Nj. 33; tók Gunnarr af þér sáðland þitt, robbed thee of seedland, 103; taka af honum tignina, to depose, degrade him, Eg. 271; vinna e-t af e-m, to carry off by force of arms, conquer, Fms. iii. 29; drepa menn af e-m, for one, slay one’s man, Eg. 417; fell þar lið mart af Eyvindi, many of Eyvind’s people fell there, 261.

γ. in such phrases as, hyggja af e-u (v. afhuga), hugsa af e-u, to forget; hyggja af harmi; sjá af e-u, to lose, miss; var svá ástúðigt með þeim, at livargi þóttist mega af öðrum sjá, neither of them could take his eyes off the other, Sturl. i. 194; svá er mörg við ver sinn vær, at varla um sér hon af hoiuun nær, Skálda 163.

3. denoting forfeiture; þá eru þeir útlagir, ok af goðorði sínu, have forfeited their priesthood, Grág. i. 24; telja hann af ráðunum fjár síns alls, to oust one, on account of idiocy or madness, 176; verða af kaupi, to be off the bargain, Edda 26; þá skalt þú af allri fjárheimtunni, forfeit all the claim, Nj. 15; ek skal stefna þér af konunni, summon thee to forfeit, a case of divorce, id.; ella er hann af rettarfari um hana, has forfeited the suit, Grág. i. 381.

β. ellipt., af ferr eindagi ef, is forfeited, Grág. i. 140.

II. denoting relation of a part to a whole, off, of, Lat. de; höggva hönd, höfuð, fót af e-um, to cut one’s hand, head, foot off, Nj. 97, 92, Bs. i. 674; höggva spjót af skapti, to sever the blade from the shaft, 264; hann lét þá ekki hafa af föðurarfi sínum, nothing of their patrimony, Eg. 25; vil ek at þú takir slíkt sem þér líkar af varningi, take what you like of the stores, Nj. 4; at þú eignist slíkt af fé okkru sem þú vili, 94.

β. ellipt., en nú höfum vér kjörit, en þat er af krossinum, a slice of, Fms. vii. 89; Þórðr gaf Skólm frænda sínum af landnámi sínu, a part of, Landn. 211; hafði hann þat af hans eigu er hann vildi, Sturl. ii. 169; þar lá forkr einn ok brotið af endanum, the point broken off, Háv. 24, Sturl. i. 169.

γ. absol. off; beit hann höndina af, þar sem nú heitir úlfliðr, bit the hand off, Edda 17; fauk af höfuðit, the head flew off, Nj. 97; jafnt er sem þér synist, af er fótrinn, the foot is off, id.; af bæði eyru, both ears off, Vm. 29.

2. with the notion of—among; mestr skörungr af konum á Norðrlöndum, the greatest heroine in the North, Fms. i. 116; hinn efniligasti maðr af ungum mönnum í Austfjörðum, the most hopeful of youths in the Eastfirths, Njarð. 364; af ( among) öllurn hirðmönnuni virði konungr mest skáld sín, Eg. 27; ef hann vildi nokkura kaupa af þessum konum, Ld. 30; ör liggr þar útiá vegginum, ok er sú af þeirra örum, one of their own arrows, Nj. 115.

β. from, among, belonging to; guð kaus hana af ollum konum sér til móður, of the Virgin Mary, Mar. A. i. 27.

γ. metaph., kunna mikit (lítið) af e-u, to know much, little of, Bragi kann mest af skáldskap, is more cunning of poetry than any one else, Edda 17.

δ. absol. out of, before, in preference to all others; Gunnarr bauð þér góð boð, en þú vildir eingi af taka, you would choose none of them, Nj. 77; ráða e-t af, to decide; þó mun faðir minn mestu af ráða, all depends upon him, Ld. 22; konungr kveðst því mundu heldr af trúa, preferred believing that of the two, Eg. 55; var honum ekki vildara af ván, he could expect nothing better, 364.

3. with the additional sense of instrumentality, with; ferma skip af e-u, to freight a ship with, Eg. 364; hlaða mörg skip af korni, load many ships with corn, Fms. xi. 8; klyfja tvá hesta af mat, Nj. 74; var vágrinn skipaðr af herskipum, the bay was covered with war ships, 124; fylla ker af glóðum, fill it with embers, Stj. 319; fylla heiminn af sínu kyni, to fill the world with his offspring, Ver. 3.

III. denoting the substance of which a thing is made, of; used indifferently with ór, though ór be more frequent; þeir gerðu af honum jörðina, af blóði hans sæinn ok vötnin, of the creation of the world from the corpse of the giant Ymir; the poem Gm. 40, 41, constantly uses ór in this sense, just as in modern Icelandic, Edda 5; svá skildu þeir, at allir hlutir væri smíðaðir af nokkru efni, 147 (pref.); húsit var gert af timbrstokkum, built of trunks of timber, Eg. 233; hjöhin vóru af gulli, of gold, golden, Fms. i. 17; af osti, of cheese, but in the verse 1. c. ór osti, Fms. vi. 253; línklæði af lérepti, linen, Sks. 287.

2. metaph. in the phrases, göra e-t af e-n ( to dispose of), verða af ( become of), hvat hefir þú gört af Gunnari, what hast thou done with Gunnar? Njarð. 376; hvat af motrinuni er orðit, what has become of it? of a lost thing, Ld. 208; hverfr Óspakr á burt, svá eigi vita menn hvat af honum er orðit, what has become of him? Band. 5.

IV. denoting parentage, descent, origin, domicile, abode:

1. parentage, of, from, used indifferently with frá; ok eru af þeim komnir Gilsbekkingar, descend from them, but a little below—frá honum eru konmir Sturlungar, Eb. 338, cp. afkvæmi; af ætt Hörðakára, Fms. i. 287; kominn af Trojumönnum, xi. 416; af Ása-ætt (Kb. wrongly at), Edda I.

β. metaph., vera af Guði (theol.), of God, = righteous, 686 B. 9; illr ávöxtr af íllri rót, Fms. ii. 48; Asia er kölluð af nafni nokkurar konu, derives her name from, Stj. 67; af honum er bragr kallaðr skáldskapr, called after his name, Edda 17.

2. of domicile; af danskri tungu, of Danish or Scandinavian origin, speaking the Danish tongue, Grág. ii. 73; hvaðan af löndum, whence, native of what country? Ísl.

β. especially denoting a man’s abode, and answering to á and í, the name of the farm (or country) being added to proper names, (as in Scotland,) to distinguish persons of the same name; Hallr af Síðu, Nj. 189; Erlingr af Straumey, 273; Ástríðr af Djúpárbakka, 39; Gunnarr af Hlíðarenda (more usual frá); þorir haklangr konungr af Ögðum, king of Agdir, Eg. 35, etc.; cp. ór and frá.

V. denoting a person with whom an act, feeling, etc. originates, for the most part with a periphrastic passive:

1. by, the Old Engl. of; as, ek em sendr hingað af Starkaði ok sonum hans, sent hither by, Nj. 94; inna e-t af hendi, to perform, 257; þó at alþýða væri skírð af kennimönnum, baptized of, Fms. ii. 158; meira virðr af mönnum, higher esteemed, Ld. 158; ástsæll af landsmönnum, beloved, íb. 16; vinsæll af mönnum, Nj. 102; í allgóðu yfirlæti af þeim feðgum, hospitably treated by them, Eg. 170; var þá nokkut drukkið af alþjóð, there was somewhat hard drinking of the people, Sturl. iii. 229; mun þat ekki upp tekið af þeim sükudólgum mínum, they will not clutch at that, Nj. 257; ef svá væri í hendr þér búit af mér, if í had so made everything ready to thy hands, Ld. 130; þá varð fárætt um af föður hans, his father said little about it, Fms. ii. 154.

2. it is now also sometimes used as a periphrase of a nom., e. g. ritað, þýtt af e-m, written, translated, edited by, but such phrases scarcely occur in old writers.

VI. denoting cause, ground, reason:

1. originating from, on account of, by reason of; af frændsemis sökum, for kinship’s sake, Grág. ii. 72; ómáli af áverkum, speechless from wounds, 27; af manna völdum, by violence, not by natural accident, of a crime, Nj. 76; af fortölum Halls, through his pleading, 255; af ástsæld hans ok af tölum þeirra Sæmundar, by his popularity and the eloquence of S., Íb. 16; af ráðum Haralds konungs, by his contriving, Landn. 157; úbygðr af frosti ok kulda, because of frost and cold, Hkr. i. 5.

β. adverbially, af því, therefore, Nj. 78; af hví, why? 686 B. 9; þá verðr bóndi heiðinn af barni sínu, viz. if he does not cause his child to be christened, K. Þ. K. 20.

2. denoting instrumentality, by means of; af sinu fé, by one’s own means, Grág. i. 293; framfæra e-n af verkum sinum, by means of one’s own labour, K. Þ. K. 142; draga saman auð af sökum, ok vælum ok kaupum, make money by, 623. I; af sínum kostnaði, at hi s own expense, Hkr. i. 217.

β. absol., hún fellir á mik dropa svá heita at ek brenn af öll, Ld. 328; hann fékk af hina mestu sæmd, derived great honotur from it, Nj. 88; elli sótti á hendr honum svá at hann lagðist í rekkju af, he grew bedridden from age, Ld. 54; komast undan af hlaupi, escape by running, Fms. viii. 58; spinna garn af rokki, spin off a wheel (now, spinna á rokk), from a notion of instrumentality, or because of the thread being spun out (?), Eb. 92.

3. denoting proceeding, originating from; lýsti af höndum hennar, her hands spread beams of light, Edda 22; allir heimar lýstust ( were illuminated) af henni, id.; en er lýsti af degi, when the day broke forth, Fms. ii. 16; lítt var lýst af degi, the day was just beginning to break, Ld. 46; þá tók at myrkja af nótt, the ‘mirk-time’ of night began to set in, Eg. 230; tók þá brátt at myrkva af nótt, the night grew dark, Hkr. ii. 230.

4. metaph., standa, leiða, hljótast af, to be caused by, result from; opt hlýtst íllt af kvenna hjali, great mischief is wrought by women’s gossip (a proverb), Gísl. 15, 98; at af þeim mundi mikit mein ok úhapp standa, be caused by, Edda 18; kenna kulda af ráðum e-s, to feel sore from, Eb. 42; þó mun her hljótast af margs manns bani, Nj, 90.

5. in adverbial phrases, denoting state of mind; af mikilli æði, in fury, Nj. 116; af móð, in great emotion, Fms. xi. 221; af áhyggju, with concern, i. 186; af létta, frankly, iii. 91; af viti, collectedly, Grág. ii. 27; af heilu, sincerely, Eg. 46; áf fári, in rage; af æðru, timidly, Nj. (in a verse); af setning, composedly, in tune, Fms. iii. 187; af mikilli frægð, gallantly, Fas. i. 261; af öllu afli, with all might, Grág. ii. 41; af riki, violently, Fbr. (in a verse); af trúnaði, confidently, Grág. i. 400.

VII. denoting regard to, of, concerning, in respect of, as regards:

1. with verbs, denoting to tell of, be informed, inquire about, Lat. de; Dioscorides segir af grasi því, speaks of, 655 xxx. 5; er menn spurðu af landinu, inquired about it, Landn. 30; halda njósn af e-u, Nj. 104; er þat skjótast þar af at segja, Eg. 546, Band. 8.

β. absol., hann mun spyrja, hvárt þér sé nokkut af kunnigt hversu for með okkr, whether you know anything about, how, Nj. 33; halda skóla af, to hold a school in a science, 656 A. i. 19 (sounds like a Latinism); en ek gerða þik sera mestan mann af öllu, in respect of all, that you should get all the honour of it, Nj. 78.

2. with adjectives such as mildr, illr, góðrafe-u, denoting disposition or character in respect to; alira manna mildastr af fo, very liberal, often-banded, Fms. vii. 197; mildr af gulli, i. 33; góðr af griðum, merciful, Al. 33; íllr af mat en mildr af gulli, Fms. i. 53; fastr af drykk, close, stingy in regard to, Sturl. ii. 125; gat þess Hildigunnr at þú mundir góðr af hestinum, that you would be good about the horse, Nj. 90, cp. auðigr at, v. at, which corresponds to the above phrases; cp. also the phrase af sér above, p. 4, col. I, ll. 50 sqq.

VIII. periphrasis of a genitive (rare); provincialis af öllum Predikaraklaustrum, Fms. x. 76; vera af hinum mesta fjandskap, to breathe deep hatred to, be on bad terms with, ix. 220; af hendi, af hálfu e-s, on one’s behalf, v. those words.

IX. in adverbial phrases; as, af launungu, secretly; af hljóði, silently; v. those words.

β. also used absolutely with a verb, almost adverbially, nearly in the signification off, away; hann bað þá róa af fjörðinn, pass the firth swiftly by rowing, row the firth off, Fms. ix. 502; var pá af farit þat seni skerjóttast var, was past, sailed past, Ld. 142; ok er þeir höfðu af fjórðung, past one fourth of the way, Dropl. 10: skína af, to clear up, of the skv, Eb. 152; hence in common language, skína af sér, when the sun breaks forth: sofa af nóttina, to sleep it away, Fms. ii. 98; leið af nóttin, the night past away, Nj. 53; dvelja af stundir, to kill the time, Band. 8; drepa af, to kill; láta af, to slaughter, kill off;

γ. in exclamations; af tjöldin, off with the awnings, Bs. i. 420, Fins, ix. 49.

δ. in the phrases, þar af, thence; hér af, hence, Fms. ii. 102; af fram, straight on, Nj. 144; now, á fram, on, advance.

X. it often refers to a whole sentence or to an adverb, not only like other prepp. to hér, hvar, þar, but also redundantly to hvaðan, héðan, þaðan, whence, hence, thence.

2. the preposition may sometimes be repeated, once elliptically or adverbially, and once properly, e. g. en er af var borit at borðinu, the cloth was taken off from the table, Nj. 176; Guð þerrir af (off, away) hvert tár af ( from) augum heilagra manna, God wipes off every tear from the eyes of his saints, 655 xx. vii. 17; skal þó fyrst bætr af lúka af fé vegaiula, pay off, from, Gþl. 160, the last af may be omitted—var þá af borið borðinu—and the prep. thus be separated from its case, or it may refer to some of the indecl. relatives er or sem, the prep. hvar, hér, þar being placed behind them without a case, and referring to the preceding relative, e. g. oss er þar mikit af sagt auð þeim, we have been told much about these riches, Band. 24; er þat skjótast þar af at segja, in short, shortly. Eg. 546; þaðan af veit ek, thence í infer, know, Fms. i. 97.

XI. it is moreover connected with a great many verbs besides those mentioned above, e. g. bera af, to excel, whence afbragð, afbrigði; draga af, to detract, deduct, hence afdráttr; veita ekki af, to be hard with; ganga at, to be left, hence afgangr; standast af um e-t, to stand, how matters stand; sem af tekr, at a furious rate; vita af, to be conscious, know about (vide VII).

D. As a prefix to compounds distinction is to be made between:

I. af privativum, denoting diminution, want, deduction, loss, separation, negation of, etc., answering indifferently to Lat. ab-, de-, ex-, dis-, and rarely to re- and se-, v. the following COMPDS, such as segja, dicere, but afsegja, negare; rækja, colere, but afrækja, negligere; aflaga, contra legem; skapligr, normalis, afskapligr, deformis; afvik, recessus; afhús, afhellir, afdalr, etc.

II. af intensivum, etymologically different, and akin to of, afr-, e. g. afdrykkja = ofdrykkja, inebrietas; afbrýði, jealously; afbendi, tenesmus; afglapi, vir fatuus, etc. etc. Both the privative and the intensive af may be contracted into á, esp. before a labial f, m, v, e. g. á fram = af fram; ábrýði = afbrýði; ávöxtr = afvöxtr; áburðr = afburðr; ávíta = afvíta (?). In some cases dubious. With extenuated and changed vowel; auvirðiligr or övirðiligr, depreciated, = afv- etc., v. those words.

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > AF
10 adeo

1.
ăd-ĕo, ĭī, and rarely īvi, ĭtum (arch. adirier for adiri, Enn. Rib. Trag. p. 59), 4, v. n. and a. (acc. to Paul. ex Fest. should be accented a/deo; v. Fest. s. v. adeo, p. 19 Müll.; cf. the foll. word), to go to or approach a person or thing (syn.: accedo, aggredior, advenio, appeto).
I.
Lit.
A.
In gen., constr.
(α).
With ad (very freq.): sed tibi cautim est adeundum ad virum, Att. ap. Non. 512, 10:
neque eum ad me adire neque me magni pendere visu'st,
Plaut. Cur. 2, 2, 12:
adeamne ad eam?
Ter. And. 4, 1, 15; id. Eun. 3, 5, 30: aut ad consules aut ad te aut ad Brutum adissent, Cic. Fragm. ap. Non. 208, 5:
ad M. Bibulum adierunt, id. Fragm. ap. Arus. p. 213 Lind.: ad aedis nostras nusquam adiit,
Plaut. Aul. 1, 1, 24:
adibam ad istum fundum,
Cic. Caec. 29 —
(β).
With in: priusquam Romam atque in horum conventum adiretis, Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 11, § 26 ed. Halm.—Esp.: adire in jus, to go to law:
cum ad praetorem in jus adissemus,
Cic. Verr. 4, § 147; id. Att. 11, 24; Caes. B. C. 1, 87, and in the Plebiscit. de Thermens. lin. 42: QVO DE EA RE IN IOVS ADITVM ERIT, cf. Dirks., Versuche S. p. 193.—
(γ).
Absol.:
adeunt, consistunt, copulantur dexteras,
Plaut. Aul. 1, 2, 38:
eccum video: adibo,
Ter. Eun. 5, 7, 5.—
(δ).
With acc.:
ne Stygeos adeam non libera manes,
Ov. M. 13, 465:
voces aetherias adiere domos,
Sil. 6, 253:
castrorum vias,
Tac. A. 2, 13:
municipia,
id. ib. 39:
provinciam,
Suet. Aug. 47:
non poterant adire eum,
Vulg. Luc. 8, 19:
Graios sales carmine patrio,
to attain to, Verg. Cat. 11, 62; so with latter supine:
planioribus aditu locis,
places easier to approach, Liv. 1, 33.—With local adv.:
quoquam,
Sall. J. 14:
huc,
Plaut. Truc. 2, 7, 60.—
B.
Esp.,
1.
To approach one for the purpose of addressing, asking aid, consulting, and the like, to address, apply to, consult (diff. from aggredior, q. v.). —Constr. with ad or oftener with acc.; hence also pass.:
quanto satius est, adire blandis verbis atque exquaerere, sintne illa, etc.,
Plaut. Ps. 1, 5, 35:
aliquot me adierunt,
Ter. And. 3, 3, 2:
adii te heri de filia,
id. Hec. 2, 2, 9: cum pacem peto, cum placo, cum adeo, et cum appello meam, Lucil. ap. Non. 237, 28:
ad me adire quosdam memini, qui dicerent,
Cic. Fam. 3, 10:
coram adire et alloqui,
Tac. H. 4, 65.— Pass.:
aditus consul idem illud responsum retulit,
when applied to, Liv. 37, 6 fin.:
neque praetores adiri possent,
Cic. Q. Fr. 1, 2, 5.—Hence: adire aliquem per epistulam, to address one in writing, by a letter:
per epistulam, aut per nuntium, quasi regem, adiri eum aiunt,
Plaut. Mil. 4, 6, 9 and 10; cf. Tac. A. 4, 39; id. H. 1, 9.—So also: adire deos, aras, deorum sedes, etc., to approach the gods, their altars, etc., as a suppliant (cf.:
acced. ad aras,
Lucr. 5, 1199): quoi me ostendam? quod templum adeam? Att. ap. Non. 281, 6:
ut essent simulacra, quae venerantes deos ipsos se adire crederent,
Cic. N. D. 1, 27:
adii Dominum et deprecatus sum,
Vulg. Sap. 8, 21:
aras,
Cic. Phil. 14, 1:
sedes deorum,
Tib. 1, 5, 39:
libros Sibyllinos,
to consult the Sibylline Books, Liv. 34, 55; cf. Tac. A. 1, 76:
oracula,
Verg. A. 7, 82.—
2.
To go to a thing in order to examine it, to visit:
oppida castellaque munita,
Sall. J. 94:
hiberna,
Tac. H. 1, 52.—
3.
To come up to one in a hostile manner, to assail, attack:
aliquem: nunc prior adito tu, ego in insidiis hic ero,
Ter. Ph. 1, 4, 52:
nec quisquam ex agmine tanto audet adire virum,
Verg. A. 5, 379:
Servilius obvia adire arma jubetur,
Sil. 9, 272.
II.
Fig.
A.
To go to the performance of any act, to enter upon, to undertake, set about, undergo, submit to (cf.: accedo, aggredior, and adorior).—With ad or the acc. (class.):
nunc eam rem vult, scio, mecum adire ad pactionem,
Plaut. Aul. 2, 2, 25:
tum primum nos ad causas et privatas et publicas adire coepimus,
Cic. Brut. 90:
adii causas oratorum, id. Fragm. Scaur. ap. Arus. p. 213 Lind.: adire ad rem publicam,
id. de Imp. Pomp. 24, 70:
ad extremum periculum,
Caes. B. C. 2, 7.—With acc.:
periculum capitis,
Cic. Rosc. Am. 38:
laboribus susceptis periculisque aditis,
id. Off. 1, 19:
in adeundis periculis,
id. ib. 24; cf.:
adeundae inimicitiae, subeundae saepe pro re publica tempestates,
id. Sest. 66, 139: ut vitae periculum aditurus videretur, Auct. B. G. 8, 48: maximos labores et summa pericula. Nep. Timol. 5:
omnem fortunam,
Liv. 25, 10:
dedecus,
Tac. A. 1, 39:
servitutem voluntariam,
id. G. 24:
invidiam,
id. A. 4, 70:
gaudia,
Tib. 1, 5, 39.—Hence of an inheritance, t. t., to enter on:
cum ipse hereditatem patris non adisses,
Cic. Phil. 2, 16; so id. Arch. 5; Suet. Aug. 8 and Dig.;
hence also: adire nomen,
to assume the name bequeathed by will, Vell. 2, 60.—
B.
Adire manum alicui, prov., to deceive one, to make sport of (the origin of this phrase is unc.; Acidalius conjectures that it arose from some artifice practised in wrestling, Wagner ad Plaut. Aul. 2, 8, 8):
eo pacto avarae Veneri pulcre adii manum,
Plaut. Poen. 2, 11; so id. Aul. 2, 8, 8; id. Cas. 5, 2, 54; id. Pers. 5, 2, 18.
2.
ăd-ĕō̆, adv. [cf. quoad and adhuc] (acc. to Festus, it should be accented adéo, v. the preced. word; but this distinction is merely a later invention of the grammarians; [p. 33] cf. Gell. 7, 7).
I.
In the ante-class. per.,
A.
To designate the limit of space or time, with reference to the distance passed through; hence often accompanied by usque (cf. ad), to this, thus far, so far, as far.
1.
Of space:
surculum artito usque adeo, quo praeacueris,
fit in the scion as far as you have sharpened it, Cato, R. R. 40, 3.— Hence: res adeo rediit, the affair has gone so far (viz., in deterioration, “cum aliquid pejus exspectatione contigit,” Don. ad Ter. Ph. 1, 2, 5):
postremo adeo res rediit: adulescentulus saepe eadem et graviter audiendo victus est,
Ter. Heaut. 1, 1, 61; cf. id. Ph. 1, 2, 5.—
2.
Of time, so long ( as), so long ( till), strengthened by usque, and with dum, donec, following, and in Cic. with quoad:
merces vectatum undique adeo dum, quae tum haberet, peperisset bona,
Plaut. Merc. 1, 1, 76; 3, 4, 72; id. Am. 1, 2, 10 al.:
nusquam destitit instare, suadere, orare, usque adeo donec perpulit,
Ter. And. 4, 1, 36; Cato, R. R. 67; id. ib. 76:
atque hoc scitis omnes usque adeo hominem in periculo fuisse, quoad scitum sit Sestium vivere,
Cic. Sest. 38, 82.—
B.
For the purpose of equalizing two things in comparison, followed by ut: in the same degree or measure or proportion... in which; or so very, so much, so, to such a degree... as (only in comic poets), Plaut. Ep. 4, 1, 38:
adeon hominem esse invenustum aut infelicem quemquam, ut ego sum?
Ter. And. 1, 5, 10.—Also followed by quasi, when the comparison relates to similarity:
gaudere adeo coepit, quasi qui cupiunt nuptias,
in the same manner as those rejoice who desire marriage, Ter. Heaut. 5, 1, 12.—
C.
(Only in the comic poets) = ad haec, praeterea, moreover, besides, too: ibi tibi adeo lectus dabitur, ubi tu haud somnum capias ( beside the other annoyances), a bed, too, shall be given you there, etc., Plaut. Ps. 1, 2, 80.—Hence also with etiam:
adeo etiam argenti faenus creditum audio,
besides too, id. Most. 3, 1, 101.—
D.
(Only in the comic poets.) Adeo ut, for this purpose that, to the end that:
id ego continuo huic dabo, adeo me ut hic emittat manu,
Plaut. Rud. 5, 3, 32:
id adeo te oratum advenio, ut, etc.,
id. Aul. 4, 10, 9:
adeo ut tu meam sententiam jam jam poscere possis, faciam, etc.,
id. ib. 3, 2, 26 (where Wagner now reads at ut):
atque adeo ut scire possis, factum ego tecum hoc divido,
id. Stich. 5, 4, 15. (These passages are so interpreted by Hand, I. p. 138; others regard adeo here = quin immo.)—
E.
In narration, in order to put one person in strong contrast with another. It may be denoted by a stronger emphasis upon the word to be made conspicuous, or by yet, on the contrary, etc.:
jam ille illuc ad erum cum advenerit, narrabit, etc.: ille adeo illum mentiri sibi credet,
Plaut. Am. 1, 2, 4 sq.; so id. Merc. 2, 1, 8 al.
II.
To the Latin of every period belongs the use of this word,
A.
To give emphasis to an idea in comparison, so, so much, so very, with verbs, adjectives, and substantives:
adeo ut spectare postea omnīs oderit,
Plaut. Capt. prol. 65:
neminem quidem adeo infatuare potuit, ut ei nummum ullum crederet,
Cic. Fl. 20, 47:
adeoque inopia est coactus Hannibal, ut, etc.,
Liv. 22, 32, 3 Weiss.:
et voltu adeo modesto, adeo venusto, ut nil supra,
Ter. And. 1, 1, 92:
nemo adeo ferus est, ut, etc.,
Hor. Ep. 1, 1, 39.—With usque:
adeo ego illum cogam usque, ut mendicet meus pater,
Plaut. Bacch. 3, 4, 10:
usque adeo turbatur,
even so much, so continually, Verg. E. 1, 12; Curt. 10, 1, 42; Luc. 1, 366.—In questions:
adeone me fuisse fungum, ut qui illi crederem?
Plaut. Bacch. 2, 3, 49:
adeone hospes hujus urbis, adeone ignarus es disciplinae consuetudinisque nostrae, ut haec nescias?
Cic. Rab. 10, 28; so id. Phil. 2, 7, 15; id. Fam. 9, 10; Liv. 2, 7, 10; 5, 6, 4.—With a negative in both clauses, also with quin in the last:
non tamen adeo virtutum sterile saeculum, ut non et bona exempla prodiderit,
Tac. H. 1, 3; so Suet. Oth. 9:
verum ego numquam adeo astutus fui, quin, etc.,
Ter. Ad. 2, 2, 13.—
Sometimes the concluding clause is to be supplied from the first: quis genus Aeneadum, quis Trojae nesciat urbem?... non obtusa adeo gestamus pectora Poeni, viz.,
that we know not the Trojans and their history, Verg. A. 1, 565:
adeo senuerunt Juppiter et Mars?
Juv. 6, 59.—Hence (post-Cic.): adeo non ut... adeo nihil ut... so little that, so far from that... (in reference to which, it should be noticed that in Latin the negative is blended with the verb in one idea, which is qualified by adeo) = tantum abest ut: haec dicta adeo nihil moverunt quemquam, ut legati prope violati sint, these words left them all so unmoved that, etc., or had so little effect, etc., Liv. 3, 2, 7: qui adeo non tenuit iram, ut gladio cinctum in senatum venturum se esse palam diceret, who restrained his anger so little that, etc. (for, qui non—tenuit iram adeo, ut), id. 8, 7, 5; so 5, 45, 4; Vell. 2, 66, 4: Curt. 3, 12, 22.—Also with contra in the concluding clause:
apud hostes Afri et Carthaginienses adeo non sustinebant, ut contra etiam pedem referrent,
Liv. 30, 34, 5. —
B.
Adeo is placed enclitically after its word, like quidem, certe, and the Gr. ge, even, indeed, just, precisely. So,
1.
Most freq. with pronouns, in order to render prominent something before said, or foll., or otherwise known (cf. in Gr. egôge, suge, autos ge, etc., Viger. ed. Herm. 489, vi. and Zeun.): argentariis male credi qui aiunt, nugas praedicant: nam et bene et male credi dico; id adeo hodie ego expertus sum, just this (touto ge), Plaut. Curc. 5, 3, 1; so id. Aul. 2, 4, 10; 4, 2, 15; id. Am. 1, 1, 98; 1, 2, 6; id. Ep. 1, 1, 51; 2, 2, 31; 5, 2, 40; id. Poen. 1, 2, 57: plerique homines, quos, cum nihil refert, pudet;
ubi pudendum'st ibi eos deserit pudor, is adeo tu es,
you are just such a one, id. Ep. 2, 1, 2:
cui tu obsecutus, facis huic adeo injuriam,
Ter. Hec. 4, 4, 68: tute adeo jam ejus verba audies, you yourself shall hear what he has to say (suge akousêi), Ter. And. 3, 3, 27: Dolabella tuo nihil scito mihi esse jucundius: hanc adeo habebo gratiam illi, i. e. hanc, quae maxima est, gratiam (tautên ge tên charin), Caes. ap. Cic. Att. 9, 16:
haec adeo ex illo mihi jam speranda fuerunt,
even this, Verg. A. 11, 275.—It is often to be translated by the intensive and, and just, etc. (so esp. in Cic. and the histt.): id adeo, si placet, considerate, just that (touto ge skopeite), Cic. Caec. 30, 87:
id adeo ex ipso senatus consulto cognoscite,
id. Verr. 2, 4, 64, 143; cf. id. Clu. 30, 80:
ad hoc quicumque aliarum atque senatus partium erant, conturbari remp., quam minus valere ipsi malebant. Id adeo malum multos post annos in civitatem reverterat,
And just this evil, Sall. C. 37, 11; so 37, 2; id. J. 68, 3; Liv. 2, 29, 9; 4, 2, 2: id adeo manifestum erit, si cognoverimus, etc., and this, precisely this, will be evident, if, etc., Quint. 2, 16, 18 Spald.—It is rarely used with ille:
ille adeo illum mentiri sibi credet,
Plaut. Am. 1, 2, 6.—Sometimes with the rel. pron.: quas adeo haud quisquam liber umquam tetigit, Plaut: Poen. 1, 2, 57; Cic. Fin. 2, 12, 37. —With interrog. pron.:
Quis adeo tam Latinae linguae ignarus est, quin, etc.,
Gell. 7, 17.—Adeo is joined with the pers. pron. when the discourse passes from one person to another, and attention is to be particularly directed to the latter: Juppiter, tuque adeo summe Sol, qui res omnes inspicis, and thou especially, and chiefly thou, Enn. ap. Prob.:
teque adeo decus hoc aevi inibit,
Verg. E. 4, 11; id. G. 1, 24: teque, Neptune, invoco, vosque adeo venti, Poët. ap. Cic. Tusc. 4, 34, 73;
and without the copulative: vos adeo... item ego vos virgis circumvinciam,
Plaut. Rud. 3, 4, 25.— Ego adeo often stands for ego quidem, equidem (egôge):
tum libertatem Chrysalo largibere: ego adeo numquam accipiam,
Plaut. Bacch. 4, 7, 30; so id. Mil. 4, 4, 55; id. Truc. 4, 3, 73:
ego adeo hanc primus inveni viam,
Ter. Eun. 2, 2, 16:
nec me adeo fallit,
Verg. A. 4, 96.—Ipse adeo (autos ge), for the sake of emphasis:
atque hercle ipsum adeo contuor,
Plaut. As. 2, 3, 24:
ipsum adeo praesto video cum Davo,
Ter. And. 2, 5, 4:
ipse adeo senis ductor Rhoeteus ibat pulsibus,
Sil. 14, 487.—
2.
With the conditional conjj. si, nisi, etc. (Gr. ei ge), if indeed, if truly:
nihili est autem suum qui officium facere immemor est, nisi adeo monitus,
unless, indeed, he is reminded of it, Plaut. Ps. 4, 7, 2: Si. Num illi molestae quippiam hae sunt nuptiae? Da. Nihil Hercle: aut si adeo, bidui est aut tridui haec sollicitudo, and if, indeed, etc. (not if also, for also is implied in aut), Ter. And. 2, 6, 7.—
3.
With adverbs: nunc adeo (nun ge), Plaut. As. 3, 1, 29; id. Mil. 2, 2, 4; id. Merc. 2, 2, 57; id. Men. 1, 2, 11; id. Ps. 1, 2, 52; id. Rud. 3, 4, 23; Ter. And. 4, 5, 26; Verg. A. 9, 156: jam adeo (dê ge), id. ib. 5, 268; Sil. 1, 20; 12, 534; Val. Fl. 3, 70. umquam adeo, Plaut. Cas. 5, 4, 23:
inde adeo,
Ter. Heaut. 1, 1, 1:
hinc adeo,
Verg. E. 9, 59: sic adeo (houtôs ge), id. A. 4, 533; Sil. 12, 646:
vix adeo,
Verg. A. 6, 498:
non adeo,
Ter. Heaut. 1, 1, 57; Verg. A. 11, 436. —
4.
With adjectives = vel, indeed, even, very, fully:
quot adeo cenae, quas deflevi, mortuae!
how very many suppers, Plaut. Stich. 1, 3, 59: quotque adeo fuerint, qui temnere superbum... Lucil. ap. Non. 180, 2: nullumne malorum finem adeo poenaeque dabis (adeo separated from nullum by poet. license)? wilt thou make no end at all to calamity and punishment? Val. Fl. 4, 63:
trīs adeo incertos caeca caligine soles erramus,
three whole days we wander about, Verg. A. 3, 203; 7, 629.—And with comp. or the adv. magis, multo, etc.:
quae futura et quae facta, eloquar: multo adeo melius quam illi, cum sim Juppiter,
very much better, Plaut. Am. 5, 2, 3; so id. Truc. 2, 1, 5:
magis adeo id facilitate quam aliā ullā culpā meā, contigit,
Cic. de Or. 2, 4, 15.—
5.
With the conjj. sive, aut, vel, in order to annex a more important thought, or to make a correction, or indeed, or rather, or even only:
sive qui ipsi ambīssent, seu per internuntium, sive adeo aediles perfidiose quoi duint,
Plaut. Am. prol. 71:
si hercle scivissem, sive adeo joculo dixisset mihi, se illam amare,
id. Merc. 5, 4, 33; so id. Truc. 4, 3, 1; id. Men. 5, 2, 74; Ter. Hec. 4, 1, 9: nam si te tegeret pudor, sive adeo cor sapientia imbutum foret, Pacuv. ap. Non. 521, 10:
mihi adeunda est ratio, quā ad Apronii quaestum, sive adeo, quā ad istius ingentem immanemque praedam possim pervenire,
or rather, Cic. Verr 2, 3, 46, 110; Verg. A. 11, 369; so, atque adeo:
ego princeps in adjutoribus atque adeo secundus,
Cic. Att. 1, 17, 9.—
6.
With the imperative, for emphasis, like tandem, modo, dum, the Germ. so, and the Gr. ge (cf. L. and S.), now, I pray:
propera adeo puerum tollere hinc ab janua,
Ter. And. 4, 4, 20 (cf. xullabete g auton, Soph. Phil. 1003).—
C.
Like admodum or nimis, to give emphasis to an idea (for the most part only in comic poets, and never except with the positive of the adj.; cf. Consent. 2023 P.), indeed, truly, so very, so entirely:
nam me ejus spero fratrem propemodum jam repperisse adulescentem adeo nobilem,
so very noble, Ter. Eun. 1, 2, 123:
nec sum adeo informis,
nor am I so very ugly, Verg. E. 2, 25:
nam Caii Luciique casu non adeo fractus,
Suet. Aug. 65:
et merito adeo,
and with perfect right, Ter. Hec. 2, 1, 42:
etiam num credis te ignorarier aut tua facta adeo,
do you, then, think that they are ignorant of you or your conduct entirely? id. Ph. 5, 8, 38.—
D.
To denote what exceeds expectation, even: quam omnium Thebis vir unam esse optimam dijudicat, quamque adeo cives Thebani rumificant probam, and whom even the Thebans (who are always ready to speak evil of others) declare to be an honest woman, Plaut. Am. 2, 2, 44.— Hence also it denotes something added to the rest of the sentence, besides, too, over and above, usually in the connection: -que adeo (rare, and never in prose; cf.
adhuc, I.): quin te Di omnes perdant qui me hodie oculis vidisti tuis, meque adeo scelestum,
and me too, Plaut. Rud. 4, 4, 122; cf. id. 4, 2, 32:
haec adeo tibi me, ipsa palam fari omnipotens Saturnia jussit,
Verg. A. 7, 427.
III.
After Caesar and Cicero (the only instance of this use adduced from Cicero's works, Off. 1, 11, 36, being found in a passage rejected by the best critics, as B. and K.).
A.
For adding an important and satisfactory reason to an assertion, and then it always stands at the beginning of the clause, indeed, for:
cum Hanno perorāsset, nemini omnium cum eo certare necesse fuit: adeo prope omnis senatus Hannibalis erat: the idea is,
Hanno's speech, though so powerful, was ineffectual, and did not need a reply; for all the senators belonged to the party of Hannibal, Liv. 21, 11, 1; so id. 2, 27, 3; 2, 28, 2; 8, 37, 2; Tac. Ann. 1, 50, 81; Juv. 3, 274; 14, 233.—Also for introducing a parenthesis: sed ne illi quidem ipsi satis mitem gentem fore (adeo ferocia atque indomita [p. 34] ingenia esse) ni subinde auro... principum animi concilientur, Liv. 21, 20, 8; so id. 9, 26, 17; 3, 4, 2; Tac. A. 2, 28.—
B.
When to a specific fact a general consideration is added as a reason for it, so, thus (in Livy very often):
haud dubius, facilem in aequo campi victoriam fore: adeo non fortuna modo, sed ratio etiam cum barbaris stabat,
thus not only fortune, but sagacity, was on the side of the barbarians, Liv. 5, 38, 4:
adeo ex parvis saepe magnarum momenta rerum pendent,
id. 27, 9, 1; so id. 4, 31, 5; 21, 33, 6; 28, 19; Quint. 1, 12, 7; Curt. 10, 2, 11; Tac. Agr. 1:
adeo in teneris consuescere multum est,
Verg. G. 2, 272.—
C.
In advancing from one thought to another more important = immo, rather, indeed, nay: nulla umquam res publica ubi tantus paupertati ac parsimoniae honos fuerit: adeo, quanto rerum minus, tanto minus cupiditatis erat, Liv. praef. 11; so Gell. 11, 7; Symm. Ep. 1, 30, 37.—
D.
With a negative after ne—quidem or quoque, so much the more or less, much less than, still less (post-Aug.):
hujus totius temporis fortunam ne deflere quidem satis quisquam digne potuit: adeo nemo exprimere verbis potest,
still less can one describe: it by words, Vell. 2, 67, 1:
ne tecta quidem urbis, adeo publicum consilium numquam adiit,
still less, Tac. A. 6, 15; so id. H. 3, 64; Curt. 7, 5, 35:
favore militum anxius et superbia viri aequalium quoque, adeo superiorum intolerantis,
who could not endure his equals even, much less his superiors, Tac. H. 4, 80.—So in gen., after any negative: quaelibet enim ex iis artibus in paucos libros contrahi solet: adeo infinito spatio ac traditione opus non est, so much the less is there need, etc., Quint. 12, 11, 16; Plin. 17, 12, 35, § 179; Tac. H. 3, 39.—(The assumption of a causal signif. of adeo = ideo, propterea, rests upon false readings. For in Cael. Cic. Fam. 8, 15 we should read ideo, B. and K., and in Liv. 24, 32, 6, ad ea, Weiss.).—See more upon this word in Hand, Turs. I. pp. 135-155.

Lewis & Short latin dictionary > adeo
11 satis

sătis, and abbreviated, săt (cf. the letter S.: satin', contr. for satisne; v.the foll.), adv. [root in Gr. adên, hadên, orig. a comp. form, weakened from satius; cf.: magis, nimis, etc.], enough, sufficiently (objectively, so that one needs nothing more; whereas affatim subjectively, so that one wishes nothing more).
I.
Posit.
1.
Adject., enough, sufficient, satisfactory.
a.
Form sătis:
quod (faenum et pabulum) bubus satis siet, qui illic sient,
Cato, R. R. 137: cui, si conjuret populus, vix totu' satis sit, were enough, adequate, Lucil. ap. Charis. p. 193 P.: libram aiebant satis esse ambobus farris Intritae, Titin. ap. Non. 81, 13; Hor. S. 1, 5, 68:
duo talenta pro re nostrā ego esse decrevi satis,
Ter. Heaut. 5, 1, 67; id. Ad. 5, 3, 24:
dies mihi hic ut sit satis vereor Ad agendum,
id. And. 4, 2, 22; cf. Liv. 21, 17:
quicquid adjecissent ipsi terroris satis ad perniciem fore rati,
id. 21, 33; cf. Quint. 12, 11, 19:
animo satis haec vestigia parva sagaci Sunt, per quae possis cognoscere cetera tute,
Lucr. 1, 402:
satis est tibi in te, satis in legibus, satis in mediocribus amicitiis praesidium,
Cic. Fin. 2, 26, 84:
ut semper vobis auxilium adversus inimicos satis sit,
Liv. 6, 18:
satis esse Italiae unum consulem censebat,
id. 34, 43; Cic. Planc. 38, 92; cf.:
ipse Romam venirem, si satis consilium quādam de re haberem,
id. Att. 12, 50:
id modo si mercedis Datur mihi... satis Mihi esse ducam,
will content myself, Plaut. Am. 2, 2, 16:
satis hoc tibi est,
Ter. Eun. 4, 7, 40:
animo istuc satis est, auribus non satis,
Cic. Or. 63, 215:
dicebant de re publicā quod esset illis viris et consulari dignitati satis,
id. Brut. 35, 135; hence, in a play on the word: Le. Jam satis est mihi. Li. Tum igitur tu dives es factus? Plaut. As. 2, 2, 64:
quidvis satis est, dum vivat modo,
Ter. Heaut. 4, 1, 28; id. Hec. 5, 2, 17:
qui non sentirent, quid esset satis,
Cic. Or. 22, 73:
sum avidior etiam, quam satis est, gloriae,
id. Fam. 9, 14, 2:
plus quam satis doleo,
id. Verr. 2, 5, 46, § 123:
semel fugiendi si data est occasio, Satis est,
Plaut. Capt. 1, 2, 9:
satis esse deberet, si, etc.,
Cic. de Or. 2, 41, 174:
satin' habes, si feminarum nulla'st, quam aeque diligam?
Plaut. Am. 1, 3, 11:
ars satis praestat, si, etc.,
Quint. 7, 10, 15:
non satis efficit oratio, si, etc.,
id. 8, 3, 62:
satis superque est,
Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 14:
poenas dedit usque superque Quam satis est,
Hor. S. 1, 2, 66:
satis superque habere dicit, quod sibi ab arbitrio tribuatur,
Cic. Rosc. Com. 4, 11:
tanta repente caelo missa vis aquae, ut ea modo exercitui satis superque foret,
Sall. J. 75, 7; cf.:
satis una excidia,
Verg. A. 2, 642 (v. infra, g and 2. b); cf.:
plura quam satis est,
Hor. Ep. 1, 10, 46:
ultra quam satis est,
id. ib. 1, 6, 16.—
(β).
Satis est (habeo, credo, etc.), with inf. or a subject- ( object-) clause:
huic satis illud erit planum facere atque probare,
Lucr. 2, 934; Cic. de Or. 1, 28, 127:
satis erat respondere Magnas: ingentes, inquit,
id. Lael. 26, 98:
velut satis sit, scire ipsos,
Quint. 8, 2, 19:
si oratori satis esset docere,
id. 10, 1, 78:
nunc libertatem repeti satis est,
Liv. 3, 53 fin.:
vos satis habebatis animam retinere,
Sall. J. 31, 20:
illud satis habeo dicere,
Quint. 6, 5, 11: satis habeo with si, Nep. Them. 8, 4; id. Timol. 2, 4; Liv. 5, 21, 9; Tac. A. 2, 37; 4, 38.—With quod, Liv. 40, 29, 13; Just. 22, 8, 14:
satis putant vitio carere,
Quint. 2, 4, 9:
si res nudas atque inornatas indicare satis videretur,
id. 2, 4, 3:
Herennium et Numisium legatos vinciri satis visum,
Tac. H. 4, 59. —Rarely with ut:
Fabio satis visum, ut ovans urbem iniret,
Liv. 7, 11, 9.—Negatively:
quarum (rerum) unam dicere causam Non satis est, verum plures,
Lucr. 6, 704:
nec vero habere virtutem satis est, nisi utare,
Cic. Rep. 1, 2, 2:
opera exstruentibus satis non est, saxa atque materiam congerere,
Quint. 7, prooem. §
1: non satis est, pulchra esse poëmata,
Hor. A. P. 99 et saep.—With inf. perf. (not freq. till after the Aug. period; cf.
Zumpt, Gram. § 590): nunc satis est dixisse: ego mira poëmata pango, etc.,
Hor. A. P. 416:
quod hactenus ostendisse satis est,
Quint. 6, 3, 62:
atque id viro bono satis est, docuisse quod sciret,
id. 12, 11, 8:
illud notasse satis habeo,
id. 9, 4, 15.—Negatively:
non ille satis cognosse Sabinae Gentis habet ritus,
Ov. M. 15, 4:
non satis credunt excepisse quae relicta erant,
Quint. 2, 1, 2.— Absol.: gaudeo. Ch. Satis credo, Ter. Eun. 5, 8, 21.—
(γ).
With gen.: As. Salve. St. Satis mihi est tuae salutis, Plaut. Truc. 2, 2, 4:
satis historiarum est,
id. Bacch. 1, 2, 48:
verborum,
id. Capt. 1, 2, 16:
satis mihi id habeam supplicii,
Ter. Ad. 3, 2, 15:
ea amicitia non satis habet firmitatis,
Cic. Lael. 5, 19:
ad dicendum temporis satis habere,
id. Verr. 2, 2, 1, § 2; cf. Quint. 10, 2, 15: satis praesidii, Cic. Fin. 2, 26, 84 Madv. N. cr.:
satis poenarum dedisse,
Quint. 7, 4, 18:
jam satis terris nivis atque dirae Grandinis misit pater,
Hor. C. 1, 2, 1:
satis superque esse sibi suarum cuique rerum,
Cic. Lael. 13, 45; so, satis superque, with gen.:
vitae,
Liv. 2, 42, 6; 63, 67, 3; 25, 32, 6; 28, 29, 7; Hor. Epod. 17, 19.— Comp.: satius; v. infra, B. —
b.
Form săt (most freq. in the poets):
quibus (dis) sat esse non queam?
to be sufficient, equal to, Plaut. Pers. 1, 1, 27:
pol vel legioni sat est (obsonium),
id. Aul. 3, 6, 24:
in jure causam dicito, hic verbum sat est,
id. Rud. 3, 6, 28; cf. id. Bacch. 4, 8, 37; id. Truc. 2, 8, 14:
tantum quantum sat est,
Cic. Sen. 14, 48:
tantum sat habes?
Ter. Heaut. 4, 3, 40:
si hoc sat est,
Quint. 2, 11, 7:
amabo jam sat est,
Plaut. As. 3, 3, 117; Ter. And. 1, 1, 143; id. Eun. 4, 4, 38; id. Phorm. 1, 4, 34:
paene plus quam sat erat,
id. ib. 5, 3, 14:
sat habeo,
id. And. 2, 1, 35; 4, 2, 22 et saep.—
(β).
Sat est (habeo, credo, etc.), with inf. or a subject- ( object-) clause:
nonne id sat erat, Accipere ab illo injuriam?
Ter. Phorm. 5, 2, 3:
perdere posse sat est,
Ov. H. 12, 75: qui non sat habuit conjugem illexe in stuprum, Poët. ap. Cic. N. D. 3, 27, 68.—
(γ).
With gen.:
sat habet favitorum semper, qui recte facit,
Plaut. Am. prol. 79: Ar. Mater salve. Art. Sat salutis't, id. As. 5, 2, 61:
vocis,
id. Truc. 2, 3, 29:
signi,
Ter. Hec. 2, 1, 39:
poenae,
Prop. 1, 17, 10 et saep.—
2.
Adverb., enough, sufficiently.
a.
Form sătis.
(α).
With verbs:
si sis sanus, aut sapias satis,
Plaut. Am. 3, 2, 23:
satis deludere,
id. ib. 5, 1, 45:
satis jam dolui ex animo et curā me satis Et lacrimis maceravi,
id. Capt. 5, 1, 7:
satin' me illi hodie scelesti ceperunt dolo?
id. ib. 3, 4, 120:
ego istuc satis scio,
Ter. Hec. 5, 4, 37; Cic. Rep. 1, 34, 53:
satis ostenderit, reliquos, etc.,
id. ib. 2, 31, 54 et saep.: quod bruti nec satis sardare queunt, Naev. ap. Fest. p. 322 Müll.:
neque audio neque oculis prospicio satis,
Plaut. Am. 5, 1, 7:
contra Epicurum satis superque dictum est,
Cic. N. D. 2, 1, 2; id. Tusc. 1, 45, 110; Hor. Epod. 1, 31; cf.:
quidque furor valeat, Penthea caede satisque Ac super ostendit,
Ov. M. 4, 429 (v. in the foll. II. D. 1. a).—
(β).
With adjectives:
satis dives,
Plaut. Aul. 2, 1, 44; id. Capt. 2, 2, 74:
dotata,
id. Aul. 2, 2, 62:
dicacula,
id. As. 3, 1, 8:
satis multa restant,
Cic. Rep. 2, 44, 71:
video te testimoniis satis instructum,
id. ib. 1, 38, 59:
rura tibi magna satis,
Verg. E. 1, 48 et saep.:
satis superque humilis est, qui, etc.,
Liv. 3, 53 fin. —Sometimes, like the Engl. enough, it denotes diminution, tolerably, moderately:
videor mihi nostrum illum consularem exercitum bonorum omnium, etiam satis bonorum, habere firmissimum,
Cic. Att. 2, 19, 4:
satis litteratus (with nec infacetus),
id. Off. 3, 14, 58:
satis bonus (locus),
Cato, R. R. 136:
res satis amplae,
Just. 2, 1, 1; cf. the foll. g and b. b.—
(γ).
With adverbs or adverbial phrases:
satis audacter,
Plaut. Am. 2, 2, 208:
satis certo scio,
id. Ps. 4, 5, 5:
satis superbe illuditis me,
Ter. Phorm. 5, 7, 22:
satis scite,
id. Heaut. 4, 4, 7:
non satis honeste,
Cic. Lael. 16, 57:
satis cum periculo,
Ter. And. 1, 1, 104: et quidem hercle formā luculentā (haec meretrix). Ch. Sic satis, id. Heaut. 3, 2, 12:
satis opportune occidisse,
Caes. B. G. 4, 22:
satis recte,
Plaut. Pers. 4, 4, 53:
satis saepe,
Sall. J. 62, 1:
satis bene ornatae,
dressed well enough, Plaut. Poen. 1, 2, 73; hence satis bene sometimes, like the Engl. well enough, = tolerably, moderately, or pretty well:
a quo (Catone) cum quaereretur, quid maxime in re familiari expediret? respondit: Bene pascere. Quid secundum? Satis bene pascere. Quid tertium? Male pascere. Quid quartum? Arare,
Cic. Off. 2, 25, 89 (for which, in the same narration, mediocriter pascere, Col. 6, praef. § 4; and Plin. 18, 5, 6, § 30); cf. supra, a. b, and infra, b. b.—
b.
Form săt.
(α).
With verbs:
sat scio,
Plaut. Aul. 3, 6, 25; Ter. Eun. 3, 2, 34; id. Ad. 3, 2, 41; 3, 3, 6; 4, 1, 10; id. Phorm. 4, 3, 31:
sat prata biberunt,
Verg. E. 3, 111.—
(β).
With adjectives:
accusator sat bonus,
Cic. Rosc. Am. 32, 89:
non sat idoneus Pugnae,
Hor. C. 2, 19, 26: sat planum. Liv. 6, 18 fin. —Signifying diminution, like the Engl. enough, tolerably, moderately, passably:
laetantibus omnibus bonis, etiam sat bonis,
Cic. Att. 14, 10, 1; so, sat bonus (less than bonus): [p. 1634] sl me voltis esse oratorem, si etiam sat bonum, si bonum denique, non repugnabo, id. de Or. 3, 22, 84.—
(γ).
With adverbs:
qui sat diu vixisse sese arbitrabitur,
Plaut. Capt. 4, 2, 12:
sat commode,
Ter. And. 3, 1, 17:
sat recte,
id. Heaut. 5, 2, 43.—
B.
Comp.: satius (prop. more satisfying; hence), better, more serviceable, fitter, preferable.
1.
Adject., in the phrase satius est, with a subject-clause (cf. supra, 1. a. b, and b. b) followed by quam:
scire satius est quam loqui Servum hominem,
Plaut. Ep. 1, 1, 57; id. Bacch. 3, 2, 11; id. Cas. 1, 24; Ter. Heaut. 3, 1, 66; 5, 2, 16; id. Ad. 1, 1, 33; Cic. Att. 7, 1, 4; id. Inv. 2, 32, 100; Liv. 26, 29; 42, 23 fin. al.; cf.:
nimio satius est, ut opu'st, te ita esse, quam ut animo lubet,
Plaut. Trin. 2, 2, 30:
quanto satius est, te id dare operam... Quam id loqui, etc.,
Ter. And. 2, 1, 7; cf.
also: satius multo fuisse, non moveri bellum adversus eum, quam omitti motum,
Liv. 34, 33:
nonne fuit satius tristis Amaryllidis iras pati?
Verg. E. 2, 14:
hos te satius est docere, ut, quando agas, quid agant, sciant,
Plaut. Poen. 3, 1, 49:
mori me satius est,
Ter. Eun. 4, 7, 2; id. Phorm. 5, 7, 63; cf.:
repertus est nemo, qui mori diceret satius esse,
Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 36, § 88:
mortuom hercle me duco satius,
Plaut. Truc. 5, 34:
terga impugnare hostium satius visum est,
Liv. 3, 70; Plaut. Ps. 1, 5, 34.—In a positive signif., it serves, benefits, is of use: nihil phluarein satius est, miles (perh. in reference to the preceding speech of the miles:
mortuum me duco satius),
Plaut. Truc. 5, 36: satius putare, with an object-clause, to believe it to be better, Nep. Paus. 5, 1.—
* 2.
Adverb., with a verb, rather (syn. potius):
ego quod magis pertineat ad Fundanii valetudinem, satius dicam,
Varr. R. R. 1, 2, 26.
II.
Particular phrases.
A.
Sat agito (also in one word, satagito), and sat agere suarum rerum, to have enough to do, have one ' s hands full; to be busy, be troubled (only in the foll. passages):
nunc agitas sat tute tuarum rerum,
Plaut. Bacch. 4, 3, 23:
is quoque suarum rerum sat agitat, tamen, etc.,
Ter. Heaut. 2, 1, 13 Bentl., followed by Umpfenb.; and so ap. Charis. p. 193 P. (Fleck. sat agit, tamen).—
B.
Satis ago or sat ago (also in one word, satago).
1.
T. t. in business lang., to satisfy, content, pay a creditor:
nunc satagit,
Plaut. As. 2, 4, 34.—
2.
To have enough to do, have one ' s hands full; to be in trouble (the predom. signif. of the word).
(α).
Form satis ago (class.): jam apud vallum nostri satis agebant, Cato ap. Charis. p. 193 P.:
cum Pyrrhus rex in terrā Italiā esset satisque agerent Romani,
Gell. 3, 8, 1:
ego nocte hac proximā In somnis egi satis et fui homo exercitus,
Plaut. Merc. 2, 1, 4:
complorantibus omnibus nostris atque in sentinā satis agentibus,
Gell. 19, 1, 3; 9, 11, 4:
satis agentes rerum suarum,
App. M. 8, p. 209, 6.— Impers. pass.:
pugnatur acriter: agitur tamen satii,
Cic. Att. 4, 15, 9.—
(β).
Form sat ago (satago) (very rare): Caesar alte-ram alam mittit, qui satagentibus celeriter occurrerent, Auct. B. Afr. 78, 7; cf. supra, II. A.—
3.
To bustle about, make a to-do, be full of business, polupragmoneuô (postAug. and very rare):
(Domitius) Afer venuste Mallium Suram multum in agendo discursantem, salientem, manus jactantem, etc.... non agere dixit, sed satagere. Est enim dictum per se urbanum satagere, etc.,
Quint. 6, 3, 54; cf. id. 11, 3, 126:
curris, stupes, satagis tamquam mus in matellā,
Petr. 58, 9.—Also act.: interea haec satagens, busily doing or performing, Petr. 137, 10.—
C.
Satis accipio, caveo, do, exigo, peto, offero, etc., t: t. of business lang., to take, give, ask, offer, etc., sufficient bail or security:
satis accipio,
Cic. Quint. 13, 44 sq.; id. Rosc. Com. 14, 40; id. Verr. 2, 1, 45, § 115; Plaut. Stich. 4, 1, 4; Dig. 36, 4, 5; 45, 1, 4; 46, 1, 33.— Pass., Cato, R. R. 2, 6:
satis acceptum habere,
to be fully assured, Plaut. Most. 1, 3, 90; 1, 3, 67:
satis caveo,
Dig. 7, 1, 60 (cf. caveo, II. 2.):
satis do (also as one word, satisdo),
Cic. Quint. 13, 44 sq.; id. Verr. 2, 1, 56, § 146; 2, 2, 24, § 60; id. Rosc. Com. 12, 35; id. Fam. 13, 28, a, 2; id. Att. 5, 1, 2; Dig. 1, 2, 8; 1, 2, 7 fin.; 36, 4, 1; 36, 4, 5; 46, 6, 1.—With gen.:
judicatae pecuniae,
Val. Max. 4, 1, 8:
damni infecti,
Plin. 36, 2, 2, § 6:
fidei commissi,
Dig. 36, 4, 5; 46, 4, 5: satisdato (caveo, promitto, debeo, etc.), by giving bail or security, ib. 5, 1, 2 fin.; 2, 11, 4 fin.; 40, 5, 4; Cic. Att. 16, 15, 2:
satis exigo,
Dig. 26, 7, 45 fin.; 36, 3, 18:
satis offero,
to tender security, ib. 26, 10, 5; 36, 4, 3; 48, 17, 1:
satis peto,
to demand security, ib. 35, 1, 70.—
D.
Sătis făcĭo, or, in one word, sătisfăcĭo ( pass. satisfacitur, Varr. ap. Prisc. p. 789 P.), to give satisfaction, to satisfy, content:
satisfacere dicimur ei, cujus desiderium implemus,
Dig. 2, 8, 1 (very freq. and class.).
1.
In gen.
(α).
With dat.:
ut illis satis facerem ex disciplinā,
Plaut. Ps. 5, 1, 28:
Siculis,
Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 53, § 139:
alicui petenti,
id. Or. 41, 140:
operam dabo ut tibi satisfaciam,
id. Att. 2, 4, 3:
deo pie et caste,
id. Fam. 14, 7, 1:
domino vel populo (gladiatores),
id. Tusc. 2, 17, 41.—In mal. part., Petr. 75; 77.—Of things:
cum aut morte aut victoriā se satisfacturum rei publicae spopondisset,
Cic. Phil. 14, 9, 26:
cui (vitae meae) satis feci vel aetate vel factis,
id. Fam. 10, 1, 1:
me omnibus satis esse facturum,
id. Balb. 1, 2:
causae atque officio satis facere,
id. Div. in Caecil. 14, 47; cf.:
satis officio meo, satis illorum voluntati, qui a me hoc petiverunt, factum esse arbitrabor,
id. Verr. 2, 5, 49, § 130:
gravibus seriisque rebus,
id. Off. 1, 29, 103:
etsi nullo modo poterit oratio mea satis facere vestrae scientiae,
id. Phil. 2, 23, 57; cf.:
qui et naturae et legibus satis fecit,
id. Clu. 10, 29:
amicitiae nostrae,
id. Fam. 10, 1, 3:
me plus satis nostrae conjunctioni amorique facturum,
id. ib. 4, 8, 2:
ut omnium vel suspicioni vel malevolentiae vel crudelitati satis fiat,
id. Rab. Post. 17, 45:
mihi vero satis superque abs te videtur istorum studiis... esse factum,
id. de Or. 1, 47, 204:
se avarissimi hominis cupiditati satis facere posse,
id. Verr. 1, 14, 41:
odio alicujus,
Suet. Tib. 66 fin.:
libidini alicujus,
Lact. 6, 11, 23:
voluntati voluntate satisfecimus,
Sen. Ben. 2, 35, 1:
condicioni,
Dig. 36, 1, 77.—
(β).
With in aliquā re:
qui (histriones) in dissimillimis personis satisfaciebant,
Cic. Or. 31, 109; so,
in historiā,
id. Leg. 1, 2, 5:
in jure civili,
id. de Or. 1, 37, 170:
in omni genere,
id. Att. 16, 5, 2.—
(γ).
With dat. and obj.-clause (rare):
quibus quoniam satisfeci me nihil reliqui fecisse, quod ad sanandum me pertineret, reliquum est, ut, etc.,
Nep. Att. 21, 5.—
(δ).
Absol.:
quamobrem tandem non satisfacit?
Cic. Fin. 1, 5, 15.—With de:
nos plene et statim de eo satis esse facturos,
Quint. 4, 5, 18.—
2.
In partic.
a.
T. t. of business lang., to satisfy, content (by payment or security), to pay or secure a creditor:
pecunia petitur ab Hermippo: Hermippus ab Heraclide petit, ipse tamen Fufiis satisfacit absentibus et fidem suam liberat,
Cic. Fl. 20, 47:
cum de visceribus tuis et filii tui satis facturus sis quibus debes,
id. Q. Fr. 1, 3, 7: ut si mihi in pecuniā minus satisfecisset, Cael. ap. Cic. Fam. 8, 12, 2; Caes. B. C. 3, 60 fin.; Dig. 40, 1, 4:
omnis pecunia exsoluta esse debet aut eo nomine satisfactum esse: satisfactum autem accipimus, quemadmodum voluit creditor, licet non sit solutum, etc.,
ib. 13, 7, 9; so (opp. solvere) ib. 18, 1, 19:
Stichus servus meus heredi meo mille nummos si solverit, satisve fecerit, etc.,
ib. 40, 4, 41; 40, 7, 39, § 1.—With gen. of the thing:
cui ususfructus legatus esset, donec ei totius dotis (sc. nomine) satis fieret, etc.,
Dig. 33, 2, 30.—
b.
To give satisfaction (by word or deed); to make amends or reparation; to make excuse; to ask pardon, apologize to a person offended, injured, etc.
(α).
With dat.:
aut satisfaciat mihi ille, etc.,
Plaut. Am. 3, 2, 8:
si Aeduis de injuriis... item si Allobrogibus satisfaciant,
Caes. B. G. 1, 14:
deinde reliquae legiones per tribunos militum egerunt, ut Caesari satisfacerent, etc.,
id. ib. 1, 41:
acceperam jam ante Caesaris litteras, ut mihi satisfieri paterer a te,
Cic. Phil. 2, 20, 49.—
(β).
With de and abl.:
omnibus rationibus de injuriis,
Caes. B. G. 5, 1, 7.—
(γ).
With gen.:
injuriarum satisfecisti L. Labieno,
Auct. Her. 4, 27, 37.—
(δ).
Absol.:
missis ad Caesarem satisfaciundi causā legatis,
Caes. B. G. 5, 54:
in quā civitate legatus populi Romani aliquā ex parte violatus sit, nisi publice satis factum sit, el civitati bellum indici atque inferri solere,
Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 31, § 79:
satisfacientes aut supplicantes summittimus (manus),
Quint. 11, 3, 115 et saep.—
c.
To give satisfaction by suffering a penalty: saepe satisfecit praedae venator, Mart. 12, 14, 3.

Lewis & Short latin dictionary > satis
12 οὐ

οὐ, the negative of

A fact and statement, as μή of will and thought; οὐ denies, μή rejects; οὐ is absolute, μή relative; οὐ objective, μή subjective. —The same differences hold for all compds. of οὐ and μή, and some examples of οὐδέ and οὐδείς are included below.—As to the Form, v. infr. G.

A USAGE.

I as the negative of single words,

II as the negative of the sentence.

I οὐ adhering to single words so as to form a quasi-compd. with them:—with Verbs: οὐ δίδωμι withhold, Il.24.296; οὐκ εἰῶ prevent, 2.132, 4.55, al.; οὐκ ἐθέλω refuse, 1.112, 3.289, al.; οὔ φημι deny, 7.393, 23.668, al. (In most of these uses μή can replace οὐ when the constr. requires it, e.g. εἰ μή φησι ταῦτα ἀληθῆ εἶναι Lycurg.34
; but sts. οὐ is retained, εἰ δ' ἂν.. οὐκ ἐθέλωσιν Il.3.289
; εἰ δέ κ'.. ου'κ εἰῶσι 20.139
; ἐὰν οὐ φάσκῃ Lys.13.76
; ἐάντε.. οὐ (v.l. μή) φῆτε ἐάντε φῆτε Pl. Ap. 25b
):—with Participles: οὐκ ἐθέλων Il.4.224
, 300, 6.165, etc.:— with Adjectives: οὐκ ἀέκοντε 5.366
, 768, al.; οὐ πολλήν Th.6.7
, etc.:— with Adverbs: οὐχ ἥκιστα Id.1.68
, etc.: rarely with Verbal Nouns (v. infr. 11.10).—On the use of οὐ in contrasts, v. infr. B.

II as negativing the whole sentence,

1 οὐ is freq. used alone, sts. with the ellipsis of a definite Verb, οὔκ (sc. ἀποκερῇ) , ἄν γε ἐμοὶ πείθῃ Pl.Phd. 89b
: sts. as negativing the preceding sentence, Ar. Pax 850, X.HG1.7.19: as a Particle of solemn denial freq. with μά (q. v.) and the acc.; sts. without μά, οὐ τὸν πάντων θεῶν θεὸν πρόμον Ἅλιον S. OT 660
(lyr.), cf. 1088 (lyr.), El. 1063 (lyr.), Ant. 758.

2 with ind. of statement, τὴν δ' ἐγὼ οὐ λύσω Il.1.29
, cf. 114, 495; οὐ φθίνει Κροίσου φιλόφρων ἀρετά Pi.P.1.94
; ἔνθα κεν οὔ τιν' ἀδάκρυτόν γ' ἐνόησας Ἀργείων Od.24.61
; οὔ κεν.. ἔπαξε Pi.N.7.25
; οὐκ ἂν ὑπεξέφυγε Il.8.369
.

3 with subj. in [tense] fut. sense, only in [dialect] Ep., οὐ γάρ τίς με βίῃ γε ἑκὼν ἀέκοντα δίηται 7.197
; οὐκ ἄν τοι χραίς μῃ κίθαρις 3.54
, cf. 11.387.

4 with opt. in potential sense (without ἄν or κεν), also [dialect] Ep., ὃ οὐ δύο γ' ἄνδρε φέροιεν 5.303
, 20.286.

5 with opt. and ἄν, κείνοισι δ' ἂν οὔ τις.. μαχέοιτο 1.271
, cf. 301, 2.250, Hdt. 6.63, A.Pr. 979, S.Aj. 155 (anap.), E.IA 310, Ar.Ach. 403, etc.

6 in dependent clauses οὐ is used,

a with ὅτι or ὡς, after Verbs of saying, knowing, and showing, ἐκ μέν τοι ἐρέω.. ὡς ἐγὼ οὔ τι ἑκὼν κατερύκομαι Od.4.377
, cf. S.El. 561, D.2.8, etc.: so with ind. or opt. and ἄν, ἀπελογοῦντο ὡς οὐκ ἄν ποτε οὕτω μωροὶ ἦσαν X.HG5.4.22
, cf. Pl.R. 330a; ὡς δὲ οὐκ ἂν δικαίως αὐτοὺς δέχοισθε μαθεῖν χρή Th.1.40
, cf. X.Cyr.1.1.3, etc.: with opt. representing ind. in orat. obliq., ἔλεξε παιδὶ σῷ.. ὡς.. Ἕλληνες οὐ μενοῖεν A.Pers. 358
, cf. S.Ph. 346, Th.1.38, X.HG6.1.1, Pl.Ap. 22b, etc.: for μή in such sentences, v. μή B. 3.

b in all causal sentences, and in temporal and Relat. sentences unless there is conditional or final meaning, χωσαμένη, ὅ οἱ οὔ τι θαλύσια.. ῥέξε Il.9.534
; ἄχθεται ὅτι οὐ κάρτα θεραπεύεται Hdt.3.80
; διότι οὐκ ἦσαν δίκαι, οὐ δυνατοὶ ἦμεν παρ' αὐτῶν ἃ ὤφειλον πράξασθαι Lys.17.3
; μή με κτεῖν', ἐπεὶ οὐχ ὁμογάστριος Ἕκτορός εἰμι Il.21.95
, etc.; νῦν δὲ ἐπειδὴ οὐκ ἐθέλεις.., εἶμι Pl.Prt. 335c
; ἐπειδὴ τὸ χωρίον οὐχ ἡλίσκετο Th.1.102
; νηπιάχοις οἷς οὔ τι μέλει πολεμήϊα ἔργα Il.2.338
, etc.: in causal relative sentences, οἵτινές σε οὐχὶ ἐσώσαμεν Pl.Cri. 46a
; esp. in the combinations, οὐκ ἔστιν ὅστις οὐ .., as οὐκ ἔστ' ἐραστὴς ὅστις οὐκ ἀεὶ φιλεῖ E.Tr. 1051
, cf. Hec. 298; οὔτις ἔσθ' ὃς οὔ S.Aj. 725
; οὐδείς ἐστιν ὅστις οὐ .. Isoc. 15.180.

c after ὥστε with ind. or opt. with ἄν, ὥστ' οὐ δυνατόν σ' εἵργειν ἔσται Ar.V. 384
, cf. S.Aj.98, OT 411; οὕτως αὐτοὺς ἀγαπῶμεν.. ὥστε.. οὐκ ἂν ἐθελήσαιμεν Isoc.8.45
; οὐκ ἂν ὡρκίζομεν αὐτὸν ὥστε τῆς εἰρήνης ἂν διημαρτήκει καὶ οὐκ ἂν ἀμφότερ' εἶχε D.18.30
: ὥστε οὐ with inf. is almost invariably due to orat. obliq., ὥστ' οὐκ αἰσχύνεσθαι (for οὐκ αἰσχύνονται) Id.19.308, cf. Th.5.40, 8.76, Lys.18.6, Is.11.27 (cj. Reiske).—Rarely not in orat. obliq., S.El. 780, E. Ph. 1358, Hel. 108, D.53.2,9.48.

7 in a conditional clause μή is necessary, except,

a in Hom., when the εἰ clause precedes the apodosis and the verb is indic., εἰ δέ μοι οὐκ ἐπέεσσ' ἐπιπείσεται Il. 15.162
, cf. 178, 20.129, 24.296, Od.2.274, Il.4.160, Od.12.382, 13.144 (9.410 is an exception).

b when the εἰ clause is really causal, as after Verbs expressing surprise or emotion, μὴ θαυμάσῃς, εἰ πολλὰ τῶν εἰρημένων οὐ πρέπει σοι Isoc.1.44
; κατοικτῖραι.., εἰ.. οὐδεὶς ἐς ἑκατοστὸν ἔτος περιέσται Hdt.7.46
, cf. S.Aj. 1242; so also δεινὸν γὰρ ἂν εἴη πρῆγμα, εἰ Σάκας μὲν καταστρεψάμενοι δούλους ἔχομεν, Ἕλληνας δὲ οὐ τιμωρησόμεθα Hdt.7.9
, cf. And.1.102, Lys.20.8 (prob.), D.8.55;
οὐκ αἰσχρόν, εἰ τὸ μὲν Ἀργείων πλῆθος οὐκ ἐφοβήθη τὴν Λακεδαιμονίων ἀρχήν, ὑμεῖς δ' ὄντες Ἀθηναῖοι βάρβαρον ἄνθρωπον.. φοβήσεσθε
; Id.15.23
, cf. Hdt.5.97, Lys.22.13.

c when οὐ belongs closely to the next word (v. A. I), or is quoted unchanged, εἰ, ὡς νῦν φήσει, οὐ παρεσκευάσατο D.54.29
codd.; εἰ δ' οὐκέτ' ἐστί (sc. ὥσπερ λέγεις)
, τίνι τρόπῳ διεφθάρη
; E. Ion 347
.

8 οὐ is used with inf. in orat. obliq., when it represents the ind. of orat. recta, φαμὲν δέ οἱ οὐ τελέεσθαι Od.4.664
, cf. Il.17.174, 21.316, S.Ph. 1389, etc.; λέγοντες οὐκ εἶναι αὐτόνομοι Th.1.67
, cf. Pl.R. 348c, X.Cyr.1.6.18; οἶμαι.. οὐκ ὀλίγον ἔργον αὐτὸ εἶναι Pl.R. 369b
, cf. S.OT 1051, Th.1.71, etc.; ἡγήσαντο ἡμᾶς οὐ περιόψεσθαι ib.39. (For the occasional use of μή, v. μή B. 5c; sts. we have οὐ and μή in consecutive clauses, οἶμαι σοῦ κάκιον οὐδὲν ἂν τούτων κρατύνειν μηδ' ἐπιθύνειν χερί S.Ph. 1058s
q.; αὐτὸ ἡγοῦμαι οὐ διδακτὸν εἶναι μηδὲ.. παρασκευαστόν Pl.Prt. 319b
.)

9 οὐ is used with the part., when it can be resolved into a finite sentence with οὐ, as after Verbs of knowing and showing, τὸν κατθανόνθ' ὁρῶντες οὐ τιμώμενον E.Hec. 316
; κατενόησαν οὐ πολλοὺς τοὺς Θηβαίους ὄντας Th.2
. 3; ἔργῳ δηλώσω οὐ παραγενόμενος Antipho2.4.8
, etc.; or into a causal sentence, τῶν βαρβάρων οἱ πολλοὶ ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ διεφθάρησαν νέειν οὐκ ἐπιστάμενοι Hdt.8.89
; τὴν Μένδην πόλιν ἅτε οὐκ ἀπὸ ξυμβάσεως ἀνοιχθεῖσαν διήρπασαν Th.4.130
; or into a concessive sentence, δόξω γυναῖκα καίπερ οὐκ ἔχων ἔχειν E.Alc. 352
, cf. S.Ph. 377, etc.: regularly with ὡς and part., ὡς οὐχὶ συνδράσουσα νουθετεῖς τάδε Id.El. 1025
, etc.; ἐθορυβεῖτε ὡς οὐ ποιήσοντες ταῦτα Lys.12.73
, cf. S.Ph. 884, Aj. 682, Hdt.7.99, Th.1.2,5,28,68,90; ὥσπερ οὐ πάντας τούτῳ τῷ τεκμηρίῳ χρωμένους Lycurg.90
, cf. Th.8.1, Isoc.4.11:—for exceptions, v. μή B. 6.

b when the part. is used with the Art., μή is generally used, unless there is a distinct reference to a fact, when οὐ is occasionally found, ἡμεῖς δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς οὐκ οὔσης ἔτι [πόλεως] ὁρμώμενοι Th.1.74
; τοὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει οὐδὲν εἰδότας Id.4.111
; οἱ οὐκ ἐθέλοντες Antipho 6.26
; τῶν οὐ βουλομένων And.1.9
; τοὺς οὐδὲν ἀδικοῦντας ἀκρίτους ἀπέκτειναν Lys.12.82
, cf. τὸν οὐδὲ συμπενθῆσαι τὰς τῆς πατρίδος συμφορὰς τολμήσαντα (preceded by τὸν.. μήτε ὅπλα θέμενον ὑπὲρ τῆς πατρίδος μήτε τὸ σῶμα παρασχόντα κτλ.) Lycurg.43; τὸ οὐχ εὑρημένον Pl.R. 427e
.

10 Adjectives and abstract Substantives with the article commonly take μή (v. μή B. 7
) but οὐ is occasionally used, τὰς οὐκ ἀναγκαίας πόσεις X.Lac.5.4
; τοὺς οὐδένας E.IA 371
; τὸν οὐδέν Id.Ph. 598
(whereas ὁ μηδείς, τὸ μηδέν is the rule); τὴν τῶν γεφυρῶν οὐ διάλυσιν the non- dissolution of the bridges, the fact of their notbeing broken up, Th.1.137; ἡ οὐ περιτείχισις Id.3.95
; ἡ τῶν χωρίων οὐκ ἀπόδοσις Id.5.35
, cf.E. Hipp. 196 (anap.); so without the article, ἐν οὐ καιπῷ Id.Ba. 1287
; οὐ πάλης ὕπο ib. 455.

11 for οὐ μή, v. sub voc.

12 in questions οὐ ordinarily expects a positive answer, οὔ νυ καὶ ἄλλοι ἔασι ..; Il.10.165; οὐχ ὁράᾳς ..; dost thou not see? Od.17.545;
οὐκ.. ᾐσθόμην
; A.Pr. 956
: so as a strong form of imper.,
οὐκ ἀπαλλάξει
; E. Ion 524
;
οὐκ ἀποκτενεῖτε τὸν μιαρὸν τοῦτον ἄνθρωπον
; Din.1.18
;
οὐκ εἶ καταπιὼν Εὐριπίδην
; Ar.Ach. 484
; βάλλε, βάλλε folld. by οὐ βαλεῖς; οὐ βαλεῖς; ib. 281 and 283, cf. S.Ant. 885: also with opt. and ἄν, οὐκ ἂν δὴ τόνδ' ἄνδρα μάχης ἐρύσαιο ( = ἔρυσαι) ; Il.5.456; οὐκ ἂν φράσειας ( = φράσον) ; S.Ph. 1222; but in questions introduced by οὐ δή, οὐ δή του, οὔ που, οὔ τί που, a doubt is implied of the statement involved, and an appeal is made to the hearers, οὐ δή ποθ' ἡμῖν ξυγγενὴς ἥκεις ποθέν; surely you are not..? Id.El. 1202, cf. Ph. 900; οὔ τί που οὗτος Ἀπόλλων ..; Pi.P.4.87, cf. S.Ph. 1233, E.IA 670, Hel. 135, Ion 1113, Ar.Ra. 522, 526.

B POSITION. οὐ is generally put immediately before the word which it negatives, οὐκ ἐκεῖνον ἐθεώμην.—ἀλλὰ τίνα μήν ; ἔφη ὁ Τιγράνης X.Cyr.3.1.41
; οὐχ αἱ τρίχες ποιοῦσιν αἱ λευκαὶ φρονεῖν Men.639
; οὐ διὰ τὸ μὴ ἀκοντίζειν οὐκ ἔβαλον αὐτὸν ἀλλὰ διὰ τὸ μηδενὶ ὑπὸ τὸ ἀκόντιον ὑπελθεῖν Antipho 3.4.6
: in Poetry the position is freq. more free, κίνδυνος ἄναλκιν οὐ φῶτα λαμβάνει Pi.O.1.81
; οὐ ψεύδεϊ τέγξω λόγον ib. 4.19; κατακρύπτει δ' οὐ κόνις ib.8.79; χρὴ πρὸς θεὸν οὐκ ἐρίζειν Id.P. 2.88
: sts. emphatically at the end of the clause, καὶ τοὶ γὰρ αἰθοίσας ἔχοντες σπέρμ' ἀνέβαν φλογὸς οὔ Id.O.7.48
; ταρβήσει γὰρ οὔ S.Aj. 545
: in clauses opposed by μέν and δέ the οὐ (or μή) is freq. placed at the end, βούλονται μέν, δύνανται δ' οὔ Th.6.38
; οὗτος δ' ἦν καλὸς μέν, μέγας δ' οὔ X.An.4.4.3
; ἔδοξέ μοι ὁ ἀνὴρ δοκεῖν μὲν εἶναι σοφὸς.., εἶναι δ' οὔ Pl.Ap. 21c
; so τὸ Πέρσας μὲν λέληθε, ἡμέας μέντοι οὔ Hdt.1.139
: freq. with ὁ μὲν.. ὁ δέ, οὐ πάσας χρὴ τὰς δόξας τιμᾶν, ἀλλὰ τὰς μέν, τὰς δ' οὔ Pl.Cri. 47a
, cf. Ap. 24e, R. 475b, etc.; Λέριοι κακοί, οὐχ ὁ μέν, ὃς δ' οὔ Phoc.1
: sts. in the first clause after μέν, οἱ δὲ στρατηγοὶ ἐξῆγον μὲν οὔ, συνεκάλεσαν δέ X.An.6.4.20
, cf. 4.8.2, Cyr.1.4.10, Pl.Phd. 73b; κατώρα πᾶν μὲν οὒ τὸ στρατόπεδον Hdt.7.208
.

C ACCUMULATION. A simple neg. (οὐ or μή) is freq. repeated in composition with Prons., Advbs., or Conjs., as οὐδείς or μηδείς, οὐδέ or μηδέ, οὐδαμῶς or μηδαμῶς, first in Hom., οὔ μιν ὁΐομαιοὐδὲ πεπύσθαι λυγρῆς ἀγγελίης Il.17.641
; ἀλλ' οὔ μοι Τρώων τόσσον μέλει ἄλγος ὀπίσσω οὔτ' αὐτῆς Ἑκάβης οὔτε Πριάμοιο ἄνακτος 6.450
; οὐκ ἔστιν οὐδὲν κρεῖσσον οἰκείου φίλου E.Andr. 986
: the first neg. may be a compd., καθεύδων οὐδεὶς οὐδενὸς ἄξιος οὐδὲν μᾶλλον τοῦ μὴ ζῶντος Pl. Lg. 808b
; οὐδενὶ οὐδαμῇ οὐδαμῶς οὐδεμίαν κοινωνίαν ἔχει Id.Prm. 166a
(similarly with μή, Phdr. 236e): or a neg. Adj., ἀδύνατος οὐδὲν ἄλλο πλὴν λέγειν μάτην E.Andr. 746
; οὐ follows the compd. neg., οὐδ' εἰ πάντες ἔλθοιεν Πέρσαι, πλήθει γε οὐχ ὑπερβαλοίμεθ' ἂν τοὺς πολεμίους X. Cyr.2.1.8
; οὐδ' ἂν ἡ πόλις ἄρα ([etym.] ὅπερ ἄρτι ἐλέγομεν ) ὅλη τοιοῦτον ποιῇ, οὐκ ἐπαινέσῃ Pl.R. 426b
, cf. Smp. 204a: sts. a confirmative Particle accompanies the first οὐ or οὐδέ, and the neg. is repeated with emphasis, οὐδὲ μὲν οὐδέ μ' ἔασκες Il.19.295
; οὐδὲ γὰρ οὐδὲ Δρύαντος υἱὸς.. δὴν ἧν 6.130
, v. οὐδέ C. 11; οὐ μέντοι οὐδὲ αὖ ὡς σύ μοι δοκεῖς οἴεσθαι Pl.Prt. 332a
: so also in Trag. and [dialect] Att. without any such Particle, οὐ σμικρός, οὔχ, ἁγὼν ὅδε not small, no, is this struggle, S.OC 587; θεοῖς τέθνηκεν οὗτος, οὐ κείνοισιν, οὔ Id.Aj. 970
, cf.Ar.Ra.28, 1308, X.Smp. 2.4, Pl.R. 390c.

2 when the compd. neg. precedes and the simple neg. follows with the Verb, the opposing negs. produce an emphatic positive, οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων ἀδικῶν τίσιν οὐκ ἀποτείσει Orac. ap. Hdt.5.56; γλώσσης κρυφαῖον οὐδὲν οὐ διέρχεται S.Fr. 935
(but prob. f.l.); οὐδεὶς οὐκ ἔπασχέ τι X.Smp.1.9
.

3 similarly each of two simple negs. may retain its negating force, ὥσπερ οὐ διὰ πρᾳότητα καὶ ἀσχολίαν τὴν ὑμετέραν οὐ δεδωκὼς ὑμῖν δίκην Lys.6.34
; ἐγὼ δ' οὐκ οἶμαι.. οὐ δεῖν ὑμᾶς ἀμύνεσθαι Id.13.52
(similarly with μή, D.19.77): sts. a combination of a μέν- clause with a δέ- clause containing οὐ is negatived as a whole by a preceding οὐ, e.g. οὐ γὰρ δήπου Κτησιφῶντα μὲν δύναται διώκειν δι' ἐμέ, ἐμὲ δέ, εἴπερ ἐξελέγξειν ἐνόμιζεν, αὐτὸν οὐκ ἂν ἐγράψατο Id.18.13
.

D PLEONASM OF οὐ: after Verbs of denying, doubting, and disputing, folld. by ὡς or ὅτι with a finite Verb, οὐ is inserted to show the neg. character of the statement, where in Engl. the neg. is not required, ὡς μὲν οὐκ ἀληθῆ ταῦτ' ἐστὶν οὐκ ἔχετ' ἀντιλέγειν D.8.31
, cf. Th.1.77, X.HG2.3.16, Smp.2.12, Isoc.5.57, etc.; οὐδεὶς ἂν τολμήσειεν ἀντειπεῖν ὡς οὐ τὴν μὲν ἐμπειρίαν μᾶλλον τῶν ἄλλων ἔχομεν Id.6.48
, cf. And.4.34, D.16.4, etc.; οὐκ ἂν ἀρνηθεῖεν ἔνιοι ὡς οὐκ εἰσὶ τοιοῦτοι Id.9.54
; ἀρνεῖσθαι ὅτι οὐ παρῆν X.Ath.2.17
; οὐδ' αὐτὸς ὁ Λάμπις ἔξαρνος ἐγένετο ὡς οὐκ εἴη εἰρηκὼς κτλ. D.34.49; ἀμφισβητεῖν ὡς οὐχὶ.. δοτέον δίκην Pl.Euthphr.8c
, cf. R. 476d, Prm. 135a; ἀπιστεῖν ὅτι οὐ .. Id.Men. 89d; ἀνέλπιστον καταστῆσαί τισιν ὡς οὐκ ἔσται μεταγνῶναι Th. 3.46
: οὐ is sts. thus used in the second member of a negative comparative sentence, ἥκει ὁ Πέρσης οὐδέν τι μᾶλλον ἐπ' ἡμέας ἢ οὐ καὶ ἐπ' ὑμέας Hdt.4.118
, cf. 5.94, 7.16.γ, Th.2.62,3.36: after πλήν, X.Lac. 15.6, D.18.45.

E OMISSION OF οὐ: οὐ is sts. omitted, esp. by Poets, when it may be supplied from the next clause, γῆ δ' οὐδ' ἀὴρ οὐδ' οὐρανὸς ἦν Ar.Av. 694
; σιδήρῳ οὐδ' ἀργύρῳ χρέωνται οὐδέν Hdt.1.215
; ῥοδιακὴ οὖς οὐδὲ πυθμένα οὐκ ἔχουσα Inscr.Délos 313a84
(iii B. C.).

F in Poetry, if ἤ stands before οὐ, the two sounds coalesce into one syllable, as in ἦ οὐχ Il.5.349
, cf. Od.1.298; so, in [dialect] Att., μὴ οὐ S. OT 283
, etc., and ἐγὼ οὔτε ib. 332, ἐγὼ οὐ Ar.Eq. 340
.—This synizesis is general in [dialect] Ep., universal in [dialect] Att.

G FORM. οὐ is used before consonants (including the digamma, e.g. before ἕθεν, οἱ, e(, Il.1.114, 2.392, 24.214, but not before ὅς Possess., οὐχ ᾧ πατρί Od.13.265
, cf. οὐκ ἐπέεσσι Il.15.162
, etc.); οὐκ before vowels with spir. lenis, οὐχ before vowels with spir. asper; in our text of Hdt. οὐκ is used before all vowels (prob. because Hdt. had no spir. asper): the [dialect] Ep. form οὐκί [ῐ] is used by Hom. mostly at the end of a clause and at the close of the verse, ὅς τ' αἴτιος ὅς τε καὶ οὐκί Il.15.137
; ἠὲ καὶ οὐκί 2.238
, 300,al.; but in the middle of a verse, 20.255; οὐχί [ῐ] is found twice in Hom., Il.15.716, 16.762, and is common in Trag., where it is freq. employed like οὔ emphatic (supr. B),
τί δ' οὐχί
; A.Ag. 273
,Fr. 310;
πῶς δ' οὐχί
; Id.Supp. 918
, Ar. Pax 1027; ἐμὸς μὲν οὐχί E.IA 859
: also in Prose, Th.1.120,al., 1 Ep.Cor. 5.12, etc.: the diphthong is genuine and always written ου ( ουκ, ουδε, etc.) in early Inscrr., IG12.10.22, etc.; in iv B.C. rarely written οκ, ib. 22.1635.112,116,121; οὐ abbreviated ο, Suid.s.v. Φιλοξένου γραμμάτιον.

H ACCENTUATION. οὐ is oxytone acc. to Hdn.Gr.1.494 (text doubtfulin 504): Arist.SE 166b6, referring to Il.23.328 τὸ μὲν ου (i.e. οὐ = οὒ) καταπύθεται ὄμβρῳ, says λύουσι.. τῇ προσῳδίᾳ λέγοντες τὸ ου ὀξύτερον (i.e. οὗ), cf. 178b3. In codd. the word is written oxytone when folld. by a pause (v. supr. B), and is usu. written without any accent in other cases.

I οὐ in connexion with other Particles will be found in alphabetical order, οὐ γάρ, οὐ μή, etc.—The corresponding forms of μή should be compared.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > οὐ
13 अर्ध _ardha

अर्ध (Written also as अर्द्ध) a. [ऋध्-णिच्-अच्; according to Nir. from धृ, or ऋध्] Half, forming a half (divided into 2 parts); अर्ध-अर्ध the one half-the other half.

-र्धः [ऋध्-घञ्]

1 A place, region, country; house, habitation (Ved.).

-2 Increase (वृद्धि).

-3 Wind.

-4 A part, portion, side.

-र्धम्, -र्धः 1 A half, half portion; पचाति नेमो न हि पक्षदर्धः Rv.1.27.18. सर्वनाशे समुत्पन्ने अर्धं त्यजति पण्डितः, गतमर्धं दिवसस्य V.2; पूर्वार्धः first half; so उत्तर˚ latter half; दक्षिण˚ southern half (half on the right side); so अवर˚, जघन˚, पर˚, ग्राम˚ &c.; यदर्धे विच्छिन्नम् Ś.1.9 divided in half; ऋज्वायतार्धम् M.27; R.3.59; 12.99; रात्रौ तदर्धं गतम् Bh.3.17; one part of two, apart, partly (Ved.);

-2 Nearness, proximity; see अर्धदेव. (अर्ध may be compounded with almost every noun and adjective; as first member of compound with nouns it means 'a half of' and forms an एकदेशिसमास or तत्पुरुष; ˚कायः = अर्धं कायस्य; ˚पिप्पली, ˚मार्गः; ˚पुरुषः &c.; with adjectives, it has an adverbial force; ˚श्याम half dark; ˚भुक्त half eaten; so ˚पिष्ट, ˚पूर्ण &c.; with numeral adjectives it may mean either 'a half of' or 'with an additional half'; ˚शतम् half of 1 i. e. 5; or अर्धेन सहितं शतम् i. e. 15; with ordinal numerals 'with a half or that number'; ˚तृतीयम् containing two and the third only half; i. e. two and a half; so ˚चतुर्थ three and a half. cf. अर्धं खण्डे समांशके Nm.

-Comp. -अक्षि n. side-look, wink. नगरस्त्रीशङ्कितार्धाक्षिदृष्टम् Mk.8.42.

-अङ्गम् half the body.

-अन्तरम् half the distance; ˚एकपदता a fault in composition; see S. D. 575.

-अंशः a half, the half.

-अंशिन् a. sharing a half.

-अर्धः, -र्धम् 1 half of a half, quarter; च<?>रर्धार्धभागाभ्यां तामयोजयतामुभे R.1.56.

-3 half and half.

-अवभेदकः 1 pain in half the head, hemicrania (Mar. अर्धशिशी). (

-कम्) dividing in equal parts.

-अवशेष a. having only a half left.

-अकारः 1 half the letter अ.

-2 N. of अवग्रह q. v.

-असिः A sword with one edge, a small sword; अर्धासिभिस्तथा खङ्गैः Mb.7.137.15.

-आसनम् 1 half a seat; अर्धासनं गोत्रभिदो$धितष्ठौ R.6.73; मम हि दिवौकसां समक्षमर्धासनोपवेशितस्य Ś.7 (it being considered a mark of a very great respect to make room for a guest &c. on the same seat with oneself).

-2 greeting kindly or with great respect.

-3 exemption from censure.

-इन्दुः 1 the half or crescent moon.

-2 semicircular impresion of a finger-nail, crescent-shaped nail-print; कुचयोर्नखाङ्कैरर्धेन्दुलीलैः N.6.25.

-3 an arrow with a cre- scent-shaped head (= अर्धचन्द्र below.); ˚मौलि N. of Śiva तत्र व्यक्तं दृषदि चरणन्यासमर्धेन्दुमौलेः Me.57.

-इन्द्र a. that of which a half belongs to Indra.

-उक्त a. half said or uttered; रामभद्र इति अर्धोक्ते महाराज U.1.

-उक्तिः f. a broken speech; an interrupted speech.

-उदकम् water reaching half the body.

-उदयः 1 the rising of the half moon.

-2 partial rise.

-3 a kind of parvan; ˚आसनम् a sort of posture in meditatiou.

-उदित a.

1 half risen.

-2 half uttered.

-ऊरुक a. [अर्धमूरोः अर्धोरु तत्र काशते] reaching to the middle of the thighs.

(-कम्) 1 a short petti-coat (Mar. परकर); see चण्डातक.

-2 mantle, veil.

-कर्णः Radius, half the diameter.

-कृत a. half done, incomplete.

-केतुः N. of Rudra.

-कोशः a moiety of one's treasure.

-कौडविक a. measuring half a kuḍava.

-खारम्, -री a kind of measure, half a Khāri; P.V.4.11.

-गङ्गा N. of the river Kāverī; (स्नानादौ गङ्गास्नानार्धफलदायिनी); so ˚जाह्नवी

-गर्भ a. Ved.

1 in the middle of the womb; सप्तार्धगर्भा भुवनस्य रेतो Rv. 1.164.36.

-2 N. of the rays of the Sun.

-गुच्छः a necklace of 24 strings.

-गुञ्जा half a gunja.

-गोलः a hemisphere.

-चक्रवर्तिन्, -चक्रिन् m. N. of the nine black Vasudevas and the nine enemies of Viṣṇu.

-चन्द्र a. crescent-shaped. (

-न्द्रः)

1 the half moon, crescent moon; सार्धचन्द्रं बिभर्ति यः Ku.6.75.

-2 the semicircular marks on a peacock's tail.

-3 an arrow with a crescent-shaped head; अर्धचन्द्रमुखैर्बाणैश्चिच्छेद कदलीसुखम् R.12.96. cf. अर्धचन्द्रस्तदाकारे बाणे बर्हे शिखण्डिनः Nm.

-4 crescent-shaped nail-print.

-5 the hand bent into a semicircle, as for the purpose of seizing or clutching anything; ˚न्द्र दा to seize by the neck and turn out; दीयतामेतस्यार्धचन्द्रः Pt.1. (

-द्रा) N. of a plant (कर्णस्फोट).

-चन्द्राकार, -चन्द्राकृति a. half-moonshaped.

-चन्द्रकम् A semi-circular pearl. Kau. (

-रः, -ति f.) meniscus.

-चन्द्रिका N. of a climbing plant. (Mar. तिळवण).

-चित्र a. Half-transparent; A kind of marble; अर्धाङ्गदृश्यमानं च तदर्धचित्रमिति स्मृतम् Māna.51.1.

-चोलकः a short bodice.

-जरतीयन्यायः a kind of न्याय, न चेदानीमर्धजरतीयं लभ्यं वृद्धिर्मे भविष्यति स्वरो नेति MBh.4.1. 78. See under न्याय.

-जीविका, -ज्या The sine of an arc.

-तनुः f. half the body.

-तिक्तः N. of a plant (नेपालनिम्ब Mar. चिराईत).

-तूरः a kind of musical instrument.

-दिनम्, दिवसः 1 half a day, mid-day.

-2 a day of 12 hours.

-देवः 1 demi-god. इन्द्रं न वृत्रतुरमर्धदेवम् Rv. 4.42.8-9.

-2 Ved. being near the gods; (देवानां समीपे बर्तमानः Sāy.).

-द्रौणिक a. measuring a half droṇa.

-धारः a knife or lancet with a single edge (one of the 2 surgical instruments mentioned by Suśruta).

-नाराचः a crescent-shaped iron-pointed arrow; नाराचानर्धनाराचाञ्शस्त्राणि विविधानि च Mbh.2.51.35; गृध- लक्षवेधी अर्धनाराचः V.5.

-नारायणः a form of Viṣṇu.

-नारीशः, -नारीश्वरः, -नारी, -नटेश्वरः a form of Śiva, (half male and half female) cf.... पतिरपि जगता- मर्धनारीश्वरो$भूत् Sūkti.5.99.

-नावम् half a boat.

-निशा midnight.

-पञ्चम a. Four and half; युक्तश्छन्दांस्य- धीयीत मासान्विप्रो$र्धपञ्चमान् Ms.4.95.

-पञ्चशत् f. twenty five Ms.8.268.

-पणः a measure containing half paṇa Ms.8.44.

-पथम् half way. (

-पथे) midway भृतिमर्ध- पथे सर्वान्प्रदाप्य Y.2.198.

-पादः half a pāda or foot; अर्धपादं किष्कुविष्कम्भमुद्धृत्य Dk.19.

-पादा The plant भूम्यामलकी (Mar. भूईआवळी).

-पादिक a. having half a foot; सद्यः कार्यो$र्धपादिकः Ms.8.325.

-पाञ्चालिक a. born or produced in the ardhapanchāla.

-पारावतः a kind of pigeon (अर्धेनाङ्गेन पारावत इव). The fran- colin partridge.

-पुलायितः a half gallop, canter; चित्रं चकार पदमर्धपुलायितेन Śi.5.1.

-प्रहर half a watch, one hour and a half.

-प्राणम् A kind of joinery resembling the shape of a bisected heart; मूलाग्रे कीलकं युक्तमर्धप्राणमिति स्मृतम् । Māna.17.99.

-भागः a half, half a share or part; तदर्धभागेन लभस्व काङ्क्षितम् Ku.5.5; R.7.45.

-भागिक a. sharing a half; मृते पितरि कुर्युस्तं भ्रातरस्त्वर्धभागिकम्म् Y.2.134.

-भाज् a. sharing entitled to a half; अर्धभाग्रक्षणाद्राजा Ms.8.39.

-2 a companion, sharer; देवानामर्धभागासि Av.6.86.3.

-भास्करः mid-day.

-भेदः Hemiplegia (अर्धाङ्गवायुः); Suś.

-भोटिका a kind of cake.

-भ्रमः -मकः a kind of artificial composition; for instances see Ki.15.27; Śi.19.72. The Sar. K. describes it as a figure of speech thus:-- आहुरर्धभ्रमं नाम श्लोकार्धभ्रमणं यदि.

-मागधी N. of a dialect in which many of Jaina Canonical books are written. It is so named perhaps because many of the characteristics of Māgadhi are found in it.

-माणवकः, -माणवः a necklace of 12 strings (माणवक consisting of 24.)

-मात्रा 1 half a (short) syllable. अर्धमात्रालाघवेन पुत्रोत्सवं मन्यन्ते वैयाकरणाः Pari Sik.

-2 a term for a consonant (व्यञ्जनं चार्धमात्रकम्).

-मार्गे ind. mid-way; बन्दीकृता विबुधशत्रुभिरर्धमार्गे V.1.3.

-मासः half a month, a fortnight.

-मासतम = ˚मासिक see P.V.2.57.

-मासिक a.

1 happening every fortnight.

-2 lasting for a fortnight; ये$र्धमासाश्च च मासाश्च Mahānārā. 25. Y.2.177.

-मुष्टिः f. a half-clenched hand.

-यामः half a watch.

-रथः [अर्धः असंपूर्णः रथः रथी] a warrior who fights on a car with another (who is not so skilled as a रथी); रणे रणे$भिमानी च विमुखश्चापि दृश्यते । घृणी कर्णः प्रमादी च तेन मे$र्धरथो मतः Mb.

-रात्रः [अर्ध रात्रेः]

1 midnight; अथार्धरात्रे स्तिमितप्रदीपे R.16.4; स्थिते$र्धरात्रे Dk.19.

-2 a night containing half a whole day of 24 hours.

-रात्रार्धदिवसः equinox.

-लभ्मीहरिः Hari having a form half like Lakṣmī.

-विसर्गः, -विसर्ज- नीयः the Visarga sound before क्, ख्, प्, and फ्, so called because its sign (<?>) is the half of a Visarga (<?>).

-वीक्षणम् a side-look, glance, leer.

-वृद्ध a. middle-aged.

-वृद्धिः The half of the interest or rent; Ms.8.15.

-वैनाशिकः N. of the followers of Kaṇāda (arguing half perishableness).

-वैशसम् half or incomplete murder; विधिना कृतमर्धवैशसं ननु मां कामवधे विमुञ्चता Ku.4.31.

-व्यासः the radius of a circle.

-शतम् 1 fifty.

-2 One hundred and fifty; Ms.8.267.

-शनम् [अर्धमशनस्य शकन्ध्वा˚] half a meal.

-शफरः a kind of fish.

-शब्द a. having a low voice.

-शेष a. having only a half left.

-श्याम a. half clouded.

-श्लोकः half a śloka or verse.

-सम a. equal to a half. (

-मम्) N. of a class of metres in which the 1st and 3rd and 2nd and 4th lines have the same sylla- bles and Gaṇas; such as पुष्पिताग्रा.

-सस्य a. half the crops, half grown.

-सहः An owl.

-सीरिन् m.

1 a cultivator, ploughman who takes half the crop for his labour; शूद्रेषु दासगोपालकुलमित्रार्धसीरिणः Y.1.166.

-2 = अर्धिक q. v.

-हर, -हारिन् a. occupying the half (of the body); Ku.1.5; एको रागिषु राजते प्रियतमादेहार्ध- हारी हरः Bh.3.121.

-हारः a necklace of 64 strings. A half chain, a kind of ornament; नक्षत्रमालामपि चार्धहारं सुवर्णसूत्रं परितः स्तनाभ्याम् Māna.5.297-98. cf. also Kau. A.2.11.

-ह्रस्वः half a (short) syllable.

Sanskrit-English dictionary > अर्ध _ardha
14 सु _su

1
सु I. 1 U. (सुवति-ते) To go, move. -II. 1, 2 P. (सवति, सौति) To possess power or supremacy. -III. 5. U. (सुनोति, सुनुते; सुत; the स् of सु is changed to ष् after any preposition ending in इ or उ)

1 To press out or extract juice.

-2 To distil.

-3 To pour out, sprinkle, make a libation.

-4 To perform a sacrifice especially the Soma (sacrifice).

-5 To bathe.

-6 To churn. -Desid. (सुषूषति-ते) -- With उद् to excite, agitate. -प्र to produce, beget.

2

सु ind. A particle often used with nouns to form Karmadhāraya and Bahuvrīhī compounds, and with adjectives and adverbs. It has the following senses:--

1 Well, good, excellent; as in सुगन्धि.

-2 Beautiful, handsome; as in सुमध्यमा, सुकेशी &c.

-3 Well, perfectly, thoroughly, properly; सुजीर्णमन्नं सुविचक्षणः सुतः सुशासिता स्त्री नृपतिः सुसेवितः......सुदीर्घकाले$पि न याति विक्रियाम् H.1.22.

-4 Easily, readily, as in सुकर or सुलभ q. v.

-5 Much, very much, exceedingly; सुदारुण, सुदीर्घ &c.

-6 Worthy of respect or reverence.

-7 It is also said to have the senses of assent, prosperity, and distress.

-Comp. -अक्ष a.

1 having good eyes.

-2 having keen organs, acute.

-अङ्ग a. well-shaped, handsome, lovely.

-अच्छ a. see s. v.

-अन्त a. having happy end, ending well.

-अल्प, -अल्पक a. see s. v.

-अस्ति, -अस्तिक see s. v.

-आकार, -आकृति a. well-formed, handsome, beautiful.

- आगत see s. v.

-आदानम् taking justly or properly; स्वादानाद्वर्णसंसर्गात्त्वबलानां च रक्षणात् । बलं संजायते राज्ञः स प्रेत्येह च वर्धते ॥ Ms.8.172.

-आभास a. very splendid or illustrious; सारतो न विरोधी नः स्वाभासो भरवानुत Ki.15. 22.

-इष्ट a. properly sacrificed; स्विष्टं यजुर्भिः प्रणतो$स्मि यज्ञम् Bhāg.4.7.41. ˚कृत् m. a form of fire; धर्मादिभ्यो यथान्यायं मन्त्रैः स्विष्टकृतं बुधः Bhāg.11.27.41.

-उक्त a. well-spoken, well-said; अथवा सूक्तं खलु केनापि Ve.3. (

-क्ता) a kind of bird (सारिका).

(-क्तम्) 1 a good or wise saying; नेतुं वाञ्छति यः खलान् पथि सतां सूक्तैः सुधा- स्यन्दिभिः Bh.2.6; R.15.97.

-2 a Vedic hymn, as in पुरुषसूक्त &c. ˚दर्शिन् m. a hymn-seer, Vedic sage. ˚वाकन्यायः A rule of interpretation according to which some thing that is declared as being subordinate to some- thing else should be understood to signify a part or whole on the basis of expediency or utility. This is discussed by जैमिनि and शबर at MS.3.2.15-18. ˚वाच् f.

1 a hymn.

-2 praise, a word of praise.

-उक्तिः f.

1 a good or friendly speech.

-2 a good or clever saying.

-3 a correct sentence.

-उत्तर a.

1 very superior.

-2 well towards the north.

-उत्थान a. making good efforts, vigorous, active. (

-नम्) vigorous effort or exertion.

-उन्मद, -उन्माद a. quite mad or frantic.

- उपसदन a. easy to be approached.

-उपस्कर a. furnished with good instruments.

-कण्टका the aloe plant.

-कण्ठ a. sweet- voiced. (

-ण्ठी) the female cuckoo.

-कण्डुः itch.

-कन्दः 1 an onion.

-2 a yam.

-3 a sort of grass.

-कन्दकः onion.

-कर a. (

-रा or

-री f.)

1 easy to be done, practi- cable, feasible; वक्तुं सुकरं कर्तुं (अध्यवसातुं) दुष्करम् Ve.3 'sooner said than done'.

-2 easy to be managed. (

-रः) a good-natured horse. (

-रा) a tractable cow. (

-रम्) charity, benevolence.

-कर्मन् a.

1 one whose deeds are righteous, virtuous, good.

-2 active, diligent. (-m.) N. of Visvakarman.

-कल a. one who has acquired a great reputation for liberality in giving and using (money &c,)

-कलिल a. well filled with.

-कल्प a. very qualified or skilled; कालेन यैर्वा विमिताः सुकल्पैर्भूपांसवः खे मिहिका द्युभासः Bhāg.1.14.7.

-कल्पित a. well equip- ped or armed.

-कल्य a. perfectly sound.

-काण्डः the Kāravella plant.

-काण्डिका the Kāṇḍīra creeper.

-काण्डिन् a.

1 having beautiful stems.

-2 beautifully joined. (-m.) a bee.

-काष्ठम् fire-wood.

-कुन्दकः an onion.

-कुमार a.

1 very delicate or soft, smooth.

-2 beautifully young or youthful.

(-रः) 1 a beautiful youth.

-2 a kind of sugar-cane.

-3 a kind of grain (श्यामाक).

-4 a kind of mustard.

-5 the wild Cham- paka.

(-रा) 1 the double jasmine.

-2 the plantain.

-3 the great-flowered jasmine.

-कुमारकः 1 a beauti- ful youth.

-2 rice (शालि).

(-कम्) 1 the Tamāla- patra.

-2 a particutar part of the ear.

-कुमारी the Navamallikā jasmine.

-कृत् a.

1 doing good, benevolent.

-2 pious, virtuous, righteous.

-3 wise, learned.

-4 for- tunate, lucky.

-5 making good sacrifices or offerings. (-m.)

1 a skilful worker.

-2 N. of Tvaṣṭri.

-कृत a.

1 done well or properly.

-2 thoroughly done; कच्चिन्नु सुकृतान्येव कृतरूपाणि वा पुनः । विदुस्ते सर्वकार्याणि Rām.2.1.2.

-3 well made or constructed.

-4 treated with kindness, assisted, befriended.

-5 virtuous, righteous, pious.

-6 lucky, fortunate.

(-तम्) 1 any good or virtuous act, kindness, favour, service; नादत्ते कस्यचित् पापं न चैव सुकृतं विभुः Bg.5.15; Me.17.

-2 virtue, moral or religious merit; स्वर्गाभिसंधिसुकृतं वञ्चनामिव मेनिरे Ku.6.47; तच्चिन्त्यमानं सुकृतं तवेति R.14.16.

-3 fortune, auspiciousness.

-4 recompense, reward.

-5 Penance; तदभूरिवासरकृतं सुकृतैरुप- लभ्य वैभवमनन्यभवम् Ki.6.29.

-कृतिः f.

1 well-doing, a good act.

-2 kindness, virtue.

-3 practice of penance.

-4 auspiciousness.

-कृतिन् a.

1 acting well or kindly.

-2 virtuous, pious, good, righteous; सन्तः सन्तु निरापदः सुकृतिनां कीर्तिश्चिरं वर्धताम् H.4.132; चतुर्विधा भजन्ते मां जनाः सुकृतिनो$र्जुन Bg.7.16.

-3 wise, learned.

-4 benevolent.

-5 fortunate, lucky.

-कृत्यम् a good action; सुकृत्यं विष्णु- गुप्तस्य मित्राप्तिर्भार्गवस्य च Pt.2.45.

-केश(स)रः the citron tree.

-क्रतुः 1 N. of Agni.

-2 of Śiva.

-3 of Indra.

-4 of Mitra and Varuṇa.

-5 of the sun.

-6 of Soma.

-क्रयः a fair bargain.

-क्षेत्र a. sprung from a good womb.

-खल्लिका luxurious life.

-ग a.

1 going gracefully or well.

-2 graceful, elegant.

-3 easy of access; अकृत्यं मन्यते कृत्यमगम्यं मन्यते सुगम् । अभक्ष्यं मन्यते भक्ष्यं स्त्रीवाक्यप्रेरितो नरः ॥ Pt.2.148.

-4 intelligible, easy to be understood (opp. दुर्ग). (

-गः) a Gandharva; गीतैः सुगा वाद्यधराश्च वाद्यकैः Bhāg.1.12.34.

(-गम्) 1 ordure, feces.

-2 happiness.

-गण् m. a good calculator; L. D. B. -a. counting well.

-गणकः a good calculator or astronomer.

-गत a.

1 well-gone or passed.

-2 well-bestowed. (

-तः) an epithet of Buddha.

-गतिः 1 Welfare, hap- piness.

-2 a secure refuge.

-गन्धः 1 fragrance, odour, perfume.

-2 sulphur.

-3 a trader.

(-न्धम्) 1 sandal.

-2 small cumin seed.

-3 a blue lotus.

-4 a kind of fragrant grass. (

-न्धा) sacred basil.

-गन्धकः 1 sulphur.

-2 the red Tulasee.

-3 the orange.

-4 a kind of gourd,

-गन्धमूला a land-growing lotus-plant; L. D. B.

-गन्धारः an epithet of Śiva.

-गन्धि a.

1 sweet-smelling, fra- grant, redolent with perfumes.

-2 virtuous, pious.

(-न्धिः) 1 perfume, fragrance.

-2 the Supreme Being.

-3 a kind of sweet-smelling mango. (

-न्धि n.)

1 the root of long pepper.

-2 a kind of fragrant grass.

-3 cori- ander seed. ˚त्रिफला

1 nutmeg.

-2 areca nut.

-3 cloves. ˚मूलम् the root Uśīra. ˚मूषिका the musk-rat.

-गन्धिकः 1 incense.

-2 sulphur.

-3 a kind of rice. (

-कम्) the white lotus.

-गम a.

1 easy of access, accessible.

-2 easy.

-3 plain, intelligible.

-गरम् cinnabar.

-गहना an enclosure round a place of sacrifice to exclude profane access. ˚वृत्तिः f. the same as above.

-गात्री a beautiful woman.

-गृद्ध a. intensely longing for.

-गृह a. (

-ही f.) having a beautiful house or abode, well-lodged; सुगृही निर्गृहीकृता Pt.1.39.

-गृहीत a.

1 held well or firmly, grasped.

-2 used or applied properly or auspiciously. ˚नामन् a.

1 one whose name is auspiciously invoked, one whose name it is auspicious to utter (as Bali, Yudhi- ṣṭhira), a term used as a respectful mode of speaking; सुगृहीतनाम्नः भट्टगोपालस्य पौत्रः Māl.1.

-ग्रासः a dainty mor- sel.

-ग्रीव a. having a beautiful neck.

(-वः) 1 a hero.

-2 a swan.

-3 a kind of weapon.

-4 N. of one of the four horses of Kṛiṣṇa.

-5 of Śiva.

-6 of Indra.

-7 N. of a monkey-chief and brother of Vāli. [By the advice of Kabandha, Rāma went to Sugrīva who told him how his brother had treated him and besought his assistance in recovering his wife, promising at the same time that he would assist Rāma in recovering his wife Sīta. Rāma, therfore, killed vāli, and installed Sugrīva on the throne. He then assisted Rāma with his hosts of monkeys in conquering Rāvaṇa, and recovering Sīta.] ˚ईशः N. of Rāma; सुग्रीवेशः कटी पातु Rāma-rakṣā.8.

-ग्ल a. very weary or fatigued.

-घोष a. having a pleasant sound. (

-षः) N. of the conch of Nakula; नकुलः सहदेवश्च सुघोषमणपुष्पकौ Bg.1.16.

-चक्षुस् a. having good eyes, seeing well. (-m.)

1 discerning or wise man, learned man.

-2 The glomerous fig-tree.

-चरित, -चरित्र a.

1 well-conducted, well-behaved; वृषभैकादशा गाश्च दद्यात् सुचरितव्रतः Ms.11.116.

-2 moral, virtuous; तान् विदित्वा सुचरितैर्गूढैस्तत्कर्मकारिभिः Ms.9.261. (

-तम्, -त्रम्) 1 good conduct, virtuous deeds.

-2 merit; तव सुचरितमङ्गुलीय नूनं प्रतनु Ś.6.1. (

-ता, -त्रा) a well-conducted, devoted, and virtuous wife.

-चर्मन् m. the Bhūrja tree.

-चित्रकः 1 a king fisher.

-2 a kind of speckled snake.

-चित्रा a kind of gourd.

-चिन्ता, -चिन्तनम् deep thought, deep reflection or consideration.

-चिरम् ind. for a very long time, very long.

-चिरायुस् m. a god, deity.

-चुटी a pair of nippers or tongs.

-चेतस् a.

1 well-minded.

-2 wise.

-चेतीकृत a. with the heart satiated; well- disposed; ततः सुचेतीकृतपौरभृत्यः Bk.3.2.

-चेलकः a fine cloth.

-च्छद a. having beautiful leaves.

-छत्रः N. of Śiva. (

-त्रा) the river Sutlej.

-जन a.

1 good, virtuous, respectable.

-2 kind, benevolent.

(-नः) 1 a good or virtuous man, benevolent man.

-2 a gentleman.

-3 N. of Indra's charioteer.

-जनता 1 goodness, kind- ness, benevolence, virtue; ऐश्वर्यस्य विभूषणं सुजनता Bh.2. 82.

-2 a number of good men.

-3 bravery.

-जन्मन् a.

1 of noble or respectable birth; या कौमुदी नयनयोर्भवतः सुजन्मा Māl.1.34.

-2 legitimate, lawfully born.

-जलम् a lotus.

-जल्पः 1 a good speech.

-2 a kind of speech thus described by Ujjvalamaṇi; यत्रार्जवात् सगाम्भीर्यं सदैन्यं सहचापलम् । सोत्कण्ठं च हरिः स्पृष्टः स सुजल्पो निगद्यते ॥

-जात a.

1 well-grown, tall.

-2 well made or produced.

-3 of high birth.

-4 beautiful, lovely; सुजातं कल्याणी भवतु कृत- कृत्यः स च युवा Māl.1.16; R.3.8.

-5 very delicate; खिद्यत् सुजाताङ्घ्रितलामुन्निन्ये प्रेयसीं प्रियः Bhāg.1.3.31.

-डीनकम् a kind of flight of birds; Mb.8.41.27 (com. पश्चाद् गतिः पराडीनं स्वर्गगं सुडीनकम्).

-तनु a.

1 having a beautiful body.

-2 extremely delicate or slender, very thin.

-3 emaciated. (

-नुः, -नूः f.) a lovely lady; एताः सुतनु मुखं ते सख्यः पश्यन्ति हेमकूटगताः V.1.1; Ś.7.24.

-तन्त्री a.

1 well-stringed.

-2 (hence) melodious.

-तपस् a.

1 one who practises austere penance; a वानप्रस्थ; स्विष्टिः स्वधीतिः सुतपा लोकाञ्जयति यावतः Mb.12.71.3.

-2 having great heat. (-m.)

1 an ascetic, a devotee, hermit, an anchorite.

-2 the sun. (-n.) an austere penance.

-तप्त a.

1 greatly harassed, afflicted.

-2 very severe (as a penance); तपसैव सुतप्तेन मुच्यन्ते किल्बिषात्ततः Ms.11.239.

-तमाम् ind. most excellently, best.

-तराम् ind.

1 bet- ter, more excellently.

-2 exceedingly, very, very much, excessively; तया दुहित्रा सुतरां सवित्री स्फुरत्प्रभामण्डलया चकाशे Ku.1.24; सुतरां दयालुः R.2.53;7.21;14.9;18.24.

-3 more so, much more so; मय्यप्यास्था न ते चेत्त्वयि मम सुतरा- मेष राजन् गतो$ स्मि Bh.3.3.

-4 consequently.

-तर्दनः the (Indian) cuckco.

-तर्मन् a. good for crossing over; सुतर्माणमधिनावं रुहेम Ait. Br.1.13; (cf. also यज्ञो वै सुतर्मा).

-तलम् 1 'immense depth', N. of one of the seven regi- ons below the earth; see पाताल; (याहि) सुतलं स्वर्गीभिः प्रार्थ्यं ज्ञातिभिः परिवारितः Bhāg.8.22.33.

-2 the foundation of a large building.

-तान a. melodious.

-तार a.

1 very bright.

-2 very loud; सुतारैः फूत्कारैः शिव शिव शिवेति प्रतनुमः Bh.3.2.

-3 having a beautiful pupil (as an eye). (

-रः) a kind of perfume. (

-रा) (in Sāṁkhya) one of the nine kinds of acquiescence.

-तिक्तकः the coral tree.

-तीक्ष्ण a.

1 very sharp.

-2 very pungent.

-3 acutely painful.

(-क्ष्णः) 1 the Śigru tree.

-2 N. of a sage; नाम्ना सुतीक्ष्णश्चरितेन दान्तः R.13.41. ˚दशनः an epithet of Śiva.

-तीर्थः 1 a good preceptor.

-2 N. of Śiva. -a. easily crossed or traversed.

-तुङ्ग a. very lofty or tall.

(-ङ्गः) 1 the cocoa-nut tree.

-2 the culminating point of a planet.

-तुमुल a. very loud.

-तेजन a. well-pointed, sharpened. (

-नः) a well-pointed arrow.

-तेजस् a.

1 very sharp.

-2 very bright, or splendid.

-3 very mighty. (-m.) a worshipper of the sun.

-दक्षिण a.

1 very sincere or upright.

-2 liberal or rich in sacrificial gifts; यज्ञैर्भूरिसुदक्षिणैः सुविहितैः संप्राप्यते यत् फलम् Pt.1. 31.

-3 very skilful.

-4 very polite. (

-णा) N. of the wife of Dilīpa; तस्य दाक्षिण्यरूढेन नाम्ना मगधवंशजा पत्नी सुदक्षिणेत्यासीत् R.1.31;3.1.

-दण्डः a cane, ratan.

-दत् a. (

-ती f.) having handsome teeth; जगाद भूयः सुदतीं सुनन्दा R.6.37.

-दन्तः 1 a good tooth.

-2 an actor; a dancer. (

-न्ती) the female elephant of the north-west quarter.

-दर्श a. lovely, gracious looking; सुदर्शः स्थूललक्षयश्च न भ्रश्येत सदा श्रियः Mb.12.56.19 (com. सुदर्शः प्रसन्नवक्त्रः).

-दर्शन a. (

-ना or

-नी f.)

1 good-looking, beautiful, handsome.

-2 easily seen. (

-नः) the discus of Viṣṇu; as in कृष्णो$प्यसु- दर्शनः K.

-2 N. of Śiva.

-3 of mount Meru.

-4 a vul- ture. (

-नी, -नम्) N. of Amarāvatī, Indra's capital. (

-नम्) N. of Jambudvīpa.

-दर्शना 1 a handsome wo- man.

-2 a woman.

-3 an order, a command.

-4 a kind of drug.

-दास् a. very bountiful.

-दान्तः a Buddhist.

-दामन् a. one who gives liberally. (-m.)

1 a cloud.

-2 a moun- tain.

-3 the sea.

-4 N. of Indra's elephant.

-5 N. of a very poor Brāhmaṇa who came to Dvārakā with only a small quantity of parched rice as a present to his friend Kṛiṣṇa, and was raised by him to wealth and glory.

-दायः 1 a good or auspicious gift.

-2 a special gift given on particular solemn occasions.

-3 one who offers such a gift.

-दिनम् 1 a happy or auspicious day.

-2 a fine day or weather (opp दुर्दिनम्); so सुदिनाहम् in the same sense.

-दिह् a. well-polished, bright.

-दीर्घ a. very long or extended. (

-र्घा) a kind of cucumber.

-दुराधर्ष a.

1 very hard to get.

-2 quite intolerable.

-दुरावर्त a. a very hard to be convinced.

-दुरासद a. unapproachable.

-दुर्जर a. very difficult to be digested.

-दुर्मनस् a. very troubled in mind.

-दुर्मर्ष a. quite in- tolerable.

-दुर्लभ a. very scarce or rare.

-दुश्चर a.

1 inaccessible.

-2 very painful.

-दुश्चिकित्स a. very difficult to be cured.

-दुष्प्रभः a chameleon.

-दूर a. very distant or remote. (

-सुदूरम् means

1 to a great distance.

-2 to a very high degree, very much; सुदूरं पीडयेत् कामः शरद्गुणनिरन्तरः Rām.4.3.12.

-सुदूरात् 'from afar, from a distance').

-दृढ a. very firm or hard, compact.

-दृश् a. having beautiful eyes. (-f.) a pretty woman.

-देशिकः a good guide.

-धन्वन् a. having an excellent bow. (-m.)

1 a good archer or bowman.

-2 Ananta, the great serpent.

-3 N. of Viśvakarman. ˚आचार्यः a mixed caste; वैश्यात्तु जायते व्रात्यात् सुधन्वाचार्य एव च Ms.1.23.

-धर्मन् a. attentive to duties. (-f.) the council or assembly of gods. (-m.)

1 the hall or palace of Indra.

-2 one diligent in properly maintaining his family.

-धर्मा, -र्मी 1 the council or assembly of gods (देवसभा); ययावुदीरितालोकः सुधर्मानवमां सभाम् R.17.27.

-2 (सुधर्मा) N. of Dvārakā; दिवि भुव्यन्तरिक्षे च महोत्पातान् समु- त्थितान् । दृष्ट्वासीनान् सुधर्मायां कृष्णः प्राह यदूनिदम् ॥ Bhāg.11.3. 4;1.14.34.

-धात a. well cleaned.

-धार a. well-pointed (as an arrow).

-धित a. Ved.

1 perfect, secure.

-2 kind, good.

-3 happy, prosperous.

-4 well-aimed or directed (as a weapon).

-धी a. having a good understanding, wise, clever, intelligent. (

-धीः) a wise or intelligent man, learned man or pandit. (-f.) a good under- standing, good sense, intelligence. ˚उपास्यः

1 a particu- lar kind of royal palace.

-2 N. of an attendant on Kṛiṣṇa. (

-स्यम्) the club of Balarāma. ˚उपास्या

1 a woman.

-2 N. of Umā, or of one of her female com- panions.

-3 a sort of pigment.

-ध्रूम्रवर्णा one of the seven tongues of fire.

-नन्दम् N. of Balarāma's club; प्रतिजग्राह बलवान् सुनन्देनाहनच्च तम् Bhāg.1.67.18.

-नन्दः a kind of royal palace.

-नन्दा 1 N. of a woman.

-2 N. of Pārvatī; L. D. B.

-3 yellow pigment; L. D. B.

-नयः 1 good conduct.

-2 good policy.

- नयन a. having beau- tiful eyes. (

-नः) a deer.

(-ना) 1 a woman having beautiful eyes.

-2 a woman in general.

-नाभ a.

1 having a beautiful navel.

-2 having a good nave or cen- tre.

(-भः) 1 a mountain.

-2 the Maināka mountain, q. v. (

-भम्) a wheel, discus (सुदर्शन); ये संयुगे$चक्षत तार्क्ष्यपुत्रमंसे सुनाभायुधमापतन्तम् Bhāg.3.2.24.

-नालम् a red water-lily.

-निःष्ठित a. quite ready.

-निर्भृत a. very lonely or private. (

-तम्) ind. very secretly or closely, very narrowly, privately.

-निरूढ a. well-purged by an injection; Charaka.

-निरूहणम् a good purgative.

-निर्णिक्त a. well polished.

-निश्चलः an epithet of Śiva.

-निषण्णः (-कः) the herb Marsilea Quadrifolia (Mar. कुऱडू).

-निहित a. well-established.

-नीत a.

1 well-con- ducted, well-behaved.

-2 polite, civil.

(-तनि) 1 good conduct or behaviour.

-2 good policy or prodence.

-नीतिः f.

1 good conduct, good manners, propriety.

-2 good policy.

-3 N. of the mother of Dhruva, q. v.

-नीथ a. well-disposed, well conducted, righteous, vir- tuous, good.

(-थः) 1 a Brāhmaṇa.

-2 N. of Śiśupāla, q. v.; तस्मिन्नभ्यर्चिते कृष्णे सुनीथः शत्रुकर्षणः Mb.1.39.11.

-3 Ved. a good leader.

-नील a. very black or blue. (

-लः) the pomegranate tree. (

-ला) common flax.

(-लम्), -नीलकः a blue gem.

-नु n. water.

-नेत्र a. having good or beautiful eyes.

-पक्व a.

1 well-cooked.

-2 thoroughly matured or ripe. (

-क्वः) a sort of fra- grant mango.

-पठ a. legible.

-पत्नी a woman having a good husband.

-पत्र a.

1 having beautiful wings.

-2 well-feathered (an arrow).

-पथः 1 a good road.

-2 a good course.

-3 good conduct.

-पथिन् m. (nom. sing. सुपन्थाः) a good road.

-पद्मा orris root.

-परीक्षित a. well-examined.

-पर्ण a. (

-र्णा or

-र्णी f.)

1 well-winged; तं भूतनिलयं देवं सुपर्णमुपधावत Bhāg.8.1.11.

-2 having good or beautiful leaves.

(-र्णः) 1 a ray of the sun.

-2 a class of bird-like beings of a semi-divine charac- ter.

-3 any supernatural bird.

-4 an epithet of Garuḍa; ततः सुपर्णव्रजपक्षजन्मा नानागतिर्मण्डलयन् जवेन Ki.16.44.

-5 a cock.

-6 the knowing (ज्ञानरूप); देहस्त्वचित्पुरुषो$यं सुपर्णः क्रुध्येत कस्मै नहि कर्ममूलम् Bhāg.11.23.55.

-7 Any bird; द्वा सुपर्णा सयुजा सखाया समानं वृक्षं परिषस्वजाते Muṇd. 3.1.1. ˚केतुः N. of Viṣṇu; तमकुण्ठमुखाः सुपर्णकेतोरिषवः क्षिप्तमिषुव्रजं परेण Śi.2.23.

-पर्णकः = सुपर्ण.

-पर्णा, -पर्णी f.

1 a number of lotuses.

-2 a pool abounding in lotuses.

-3 N. of the mother of Garuḍa.

-पर्यवदात a. very clean.

-पर्याप्त a.

1 very spacious; तस्य मध्ये सुपर्याप्तं कारयेद् गृहमात्मनः Ms.7.76.

-2 well-fitted.

-पर्वन् a. well- jointed, having many joints or knots. (-m.)

1 a bam- boo.

-2 an arrow.

-3 a god, deity; विहाय या सर्वसुपर्व- नायकम् N.4.9;14.41,76.

-4 a special lunar day (as the day of full or new moon, and the 8th and 14th day of each fortnight).

-5 smoke. (-f.) white Dūrvā grass.

-पलायित a.

1 completely fled or run away.

-2 skilfully retreated.

-पाक्यम् a kind of medicinal salt (Mar. बिडलोण).

-पात्रम् 1 a good or suitable vessel, worthy receptacle.

-2 a fit or competent person, any one well-fitted for an office, an able person.

-पाद् (

-पाद् or

-पदी f.) having good or handsome feet.

-पार्श्वः 1 the waved-leaf fig-tree (प्लक्ष).

-2 N. of the son of Sampāti, elder brother of Jaṭāyu.

-पालि a. distinguished.

-पीतम् 1 a carrot.

-2 yellow sandal. (

-तः) the fifth Muhūrta.

-पुंसी a woman having a good husband.

-पुरम् a strong fortress.

-पुष्प a. (

-ष्पा or

-ष्पी f.) having beautiful flowers.

(-ष्पः) 1 the coral tree.

-2 the Śirīṣa tree. (

-ष्पी) the plantain tree.

(-ष्पम्) 1 cloves.

-2 the menstrual excretion.

-पुष्पित a.

1 well blossomed, being in full flower.

-2 having the hair thrilling or bristling.

-पूर a.

1 easy to be filled; सुपूरा स्यात् कुनदिका सुपूरो मूषिकाञ्जलिः Pt.1.25.

-2 well-filling. (

-रः) a kind of citron (बीजपूर).

-पूरकः the Baka-puṣpa tree.

-पेशस् a. beautiful, tender; रत्नानां पद्मरागो$स्मि पद्मकोशः सुपेशसाम् Bhāg.11.16.3. ˚कृत् m. a kind of fly; Bhāg.11.7.34.

-प्रकाश a.

1 manifest, apparent; ज्येष्ठे मासि नयेत् सीमां सुप्रकाशेषु सेतुषु Ms.8.245.

-2 public, notorious.

-प्रतर्कः a sound judgment.

-प्रतिभा spirituous liquor.

-प्रतिष्ठ a.

1 standing well.

-2 very celebrated, renowned, glorious, famous.

(-ष्ठा) 1 good position.

-2 good reputation, fame, celebrity.

-3 esta- blishment, erection.

-4 installation, consecration.

-प्रतिष्ठित a.

1 well-established.

-2 consecrated.

-3 ce- lebrated. (

-तः) the Udumbara tree.

-प्रतिष्णात a.

1 thoroughly purified.

-2 well-versed in.

-3 well-investi- gated, clearly ascertained or determined.

-प्रतीक a.

1 having a beautiful shape, lovely, handsome; भगवान् भागवतवात्सल्यतया सुप्रतीकः Bhāg.5.3.2.

-2 having a beau- tiful trunk.

(-कः) 1 an epithet of Kāmadeva.

-2 of Śiva.

-3 of the elephant of the north-east quarter.

-4 An honest man; स्तेयोपायैर्विरचितकृतिः सुप्रतीको यथास्ते Bhāg.1.8.31.

-प्रपाणम् a good tank.

-प्रभ a. very brilliant, glorious. (

-भा) one of the seven tongues of fire.

-प्रभातम् 1 an auspicious dawn or day-break; दिष्टथा सुप्रभातमद्य यदयं देवो दृष्टः U.6.

-2 the earliest dawn.

-प्रभावः omnipotence.

-प्रमाण a. large-sized.

-प्रयुक्तशरः a skilful archer.

-प्रयोगः 1 good management or ap- plication.

-2 close contact.

-3 dexterity.

-प्रलापः good speech, eloquence.

-प्रसन्नः N. of Kubera.

-प्रसाद a. very gracious or propitious. (

-दः) N. of Śiva.

-प्रातम् a fine morning.

-प्रिय a. very much liked, agreeable. (

-यः) (in prosody) a foot of two short syllables.

(-या) 1 a charming woman.

-2 a beloved mistress.

-प्रौढा a marriageable girl.

-फल a.

1 very fruitful, very productive.

-2 very fertile.

(-लः) 1 the pomegranate tree.

-2 the jujube.

-3 the Karṇikāra tree.

-4 a kind of bean.

(-ला) 1 a pumpkin, gourd.

-2 the plan- tain tree.

-3 a variety of brown grape.

-4 colocynth.

-फेनः a cuttle-fish bone.

-बन्धः sesamum.

-बभ्रु a. dark-brown.

-बल a. very powerful.

(-लः) 1 N. of Śiva.

-2 N. of the father of Śakuni.

-बान्धवः N. of Śiva.

-बाल a. very childish.

-बाहु a.

1 handsome- armed.

-2 strong-armed. (

-हुः) N. of a demon, brother of Mārīcha, who had become a demon by the curse of Agastya. He with Mārīcha began to disturb the sacrifice of Viśvāmitra, but was defeated by Rāma. and Lakṣmaṇa; यः सुबाहुरिति राक्षसो$परस्तत्र तत्र विससर्प मायया R.11.29.

-बीजम् good seed; सुबीजं चैव सुक्षेत्रे जातं संपद्यते तथा Ms.1.69.

(-जः) 1 N. of Śiva.

-2 the poppy.

-बोध a.

1 easily apprehended or understood. (

-धः) good information or advice.

-ब्रह्मण्यः 1 an epithet of Kārtikeya.

-2 N. of one of the sixteen priests employed at a sacrifice.

-भग a.

1 very fortu- nate or prosperous, happy, blessed, highly favoured.

-2 lovely, charming, beautiful, pretty; न तु ग्रीष्मस्यैवं सुभगमपराद्धं युवतिषु Ś.3.9; Ku.4.34; R.11.8; Māl.9.

-3 pleasant, grateful, agreeable, sweet; दिवसाः सुभगा- दित्याश्छायासलिलदुर्भगाः Rām.3.16.1; श्रवणसुभग M.3.4; Ś.1.3.

-4 beloved, liked, amiable, dear; सुमुखि सुभगः पश्यन् स त्वामुपैतु कृतार्थताम् Gīt.5.

-5 illustrious.

(-गः) 1 borax.

-2 the Aśoka tree.

-3 the Champaka tree.

-4 red amarnath. (

-गम्) good fortune. ˚मानिन्, सुभगं- मन्य a.

1 considering oneself fortunate, amiable, pleasing; वाचालं मां न खलु सुभगंमन्यभावः करोति Me.96.

-2 vain, flattering oneself.

-भगा 1 a woman beloved by her hus- band, a favourite wife.

-2 an honoured mother.

-3 a kind of wild jasmine.

-4 turmeric.

-5 the Priyaṅgu creeper.

-6 the holy basil.

-7 a woman having her husband alive (सौभाग्यवती); जयशब्दैर्द्विजाग्र्याणां सुभगानर्तितै- स्तथा Mb.7.7.9.

-8 a five-year old girl representing Durgā at festivals.

-9 musk. ˚सुत the son of a favou- rite wife.

-भङ्गः the cocoa-nut tree.

-भटः a great war- rior, champion, soldier.

-भट्टः a learned man.

-भद्र a. very happy or fortunate. (

-द्रः) N. of Viṣṇu; साकं साकम्पमंसे वसति विदधती बासुभद्रं सुभद्रम् Viṣṇupāda S.31. (

-द्रा) N. of the sister of Balarāma and Kṛiṣṇa, married to Arjuna q. v. She bore to him a son named Abhimanyu.

-भद्रकः 1 a car for carrying the image of a god.

-2 the Bilva tree.

-भाषित a.

1 spoken well or eloquent.

(-तम्) 1 fine speech, eloquence, learning; जीर्णमङ्गे सुभाषितम् Bh.3.2.

-2ल a witty saying, an apophthegm, an apposite saying; सुभाषितेन गीतेन युवतीनां च लीलया । मनो न भिद्यते यस्य स वै मुक्तो$थवा पशुः Subhāṣ.

-3 a good remark; बालादपि सुभाषितम् (ग्राह्यम्).

-भिक्षम् 1 good alms, successful begging.

-2 abundance of food, an abundant supply of provisions, plenty of corn &c.

-भीरकः the Palāśa tree.

-भीरुकम् silver.

-भूतिः 1 well-being, wel- fare.

-2 the Tittira bird; Gīrvāṇa.

-भूतिकः the Bilva tree.

-भूषणम् a type of pavilion where a ceremony is performed on a wife's perceiving the first signs of con- ception; सुभूषणाख्यं विप्राणां योग्यं पुंसवनार्थकम् Māna.34.354.

-भृत a.

1 well-paid.

-2 heavily laden.

-भ्रू a. having beautiful eyebrows. (

-भ्रूः f.) a lovely woman. (N. B. The vocative singular of this word is strictly सुभ्रूः; but सुभ्रु is used by writers like Bhaṭṭi. Kālidāsa, and Bhavabhūti; हा पितः क्वासि हे सुभ्रु Bk.6.17; so V.3.22; Ku.5.43; Māl.3.8.)

-मङ्गल a.

1 very auspicious.

-2 abounding in sacrifices.

-मति a. very wise. (

-तिः f.)

1 a good mind or disposition, kindness, benevolence, friendship.

-2 a favour of the gods.

-3 a gift, blessing.

-4 a prayer, hymn.

-5 a wish or desire.

-6 N. of the wife of Sagara and mother of 6, sons.

-मदनः the mango tree.

-मदात्मजा a celestial damsel.

-मधुरम् a very sweet or gentle speech, agreeable words.

-मध्य, -मध्यम a. slender-waisted.

-मध्या, -मध्यमा a graceful woman.

-मन a. very charming, lovely, beautiful.

(-नः) 1 wheat.

-2 the thorn-apple. (

-ना) the great-flowered jasmine.

-मनस् a.

1 good-minded, of a good disposition, benevolent; शान्तसंकल्पः सुमना यथा स्याद्वीतमन्युर्गौतमो माभिमृत्यो Kaṭh.1.1.

-2 well-pleased, satisfied; (hence

-सुमनीभू = to be at ease; जिते नृपारौ समनीभवन्ति शद्बायमानान्यशनैरशङ्कम् Bk.2.54.). (-m.)

1 a god, divinity.

-2 a learned man.

-3 a student of the Vedas.

-4 wheat.

-5 the Nimba tree. (-f., n.; said to be pl. only by some) a flower; मुमुचुर्मुनयो देवाः सुमनांसि मुदान्विताः Bhāg.1.3.7; रमणीय एष वः सुमनसां संनिवेशः Māl.1. (where the adjectival; sense in 1 is also intended); किं सेव्यते सुमनसां मनसापि गन्धः कस्तू- रिकाजननशक्तिभृता मृगेण R.G; Śi.6.66. ˚वर्णकम् flowers, unguent or perfume etc. for the body; सा तदाप्रभृति सुमनो- वर्णकं नेच्छति Avimārakam 2. (-f.)

1 the great-flowered jasmine.

-2 the Mālatī creeper. ˚फलः the woodapple. ˚फलम् nutmeg.

-मनस्क a. cheerful, happy.

-मन्तु a.

1 advising well.

-2 very faulty or blameable. (-m.) a good adviser.

-मन्त्रः N. of the charioteer of Daśāratha.

-मन्दभाज् a. very unfortunate.

-मर्दित a. much harassed.

-मर्षण a. easy to be borne.

-मित्रा 1 N. of one of the wives of Daśāratha and mother of Lakṣmaṇa and Śatrughna.

-मुख a. (

-खा or

-खी f.)

1 having a beautiful face, lovely.

-2 pleasing.

-3 disposed to, eager for; सुरसद्मयानसुमुखी जनता Ki.6.42.

-4 favour- able, kind.

-5 well-pointed (as an arrow).

-6 (सुमुखा) having a good entrance.

(-खः) 1 a learned man.

-2 an epithet of Garuḍa.

-3 of Gaṇeśa; सुमुखश्चैकदन्तश्च कपिलो गजकर्णकः Maṅgal. S.1.

-4 of Śiva.

(-खम्) 1 the scratch of a finger-nail.

-2 a kind of building.

(-खा, -खी) 1 a handsome woman.

-2 a mirror.

-मूलकम् a carrot.

-मृत a. stone-dead.

-मेखलः the Muñja grass.

-मेधस a. having a good understanding, wise, intelligent; इमे अङ्गिरसः सत्रमासते$द्य सुमेधसः Bhāg.9.4.3. (-m.) a wise man. (-f.) heart-pea.

-मेरुः 1 the sac- red mountain Meru, q. v.

-2 N. of Śiva.

-यन्त्रित a.

1 well-governed.

-2 self-controlled.

-यमाः a parti- cular class of gods; जातो रुचेरजनयत् सुयमान् सुयज्ञ आकूति- सूनुरमरानथ दक्षिणायाम् Bhāg.2.7.2.

-यवसम् beautiful grass, good pasturage.

-यामुनः 1 a palace.

-2 N. of Viṣṇu.

-युक्तः N. of Śiva.

-योगः 1 a favourable junc- ture.

-2 good opportunity.

-योधनः an epithet of Duryodhana q. v.

-रक्त a.

1 well coloured.

-2 im- passioned.

-3 very lovely.

-4 sweet-voiced; सुरक्तगोपी- जनगीतनिःस्वने Ki.4.33.

-रक्तकः 1 a kind of red chalk.

-2 a kind of mango tree.

-रङ्गः 1 good colour.

-2 the orange.

-3 a hole cut in a house (सुरङ्गा also in this sense).

(-ङ्गम्) 1 red sanders.

-2 vermilion. ˚धातुः red chalk. ˚युज् m. a house-breaker.

-रङ्गिका the Mūrvā plant.

-रजःफलः the jack-fruit tree.

-रञ्जनः the betel nut tree.

-रत a.

1 much sported.

-2 playful.

-3 much enjoyed.

-4 compassionate, tender.

(-तम्) 1 great delight or enjoyment.

-2 copulation, sexual union or intercourse, coition; सुरतमृदिता बालवनिता Bh.2. 44. ˚गुरुः the husband; पर्यच्छे सरसि हृतें$शुके पयोभिर्लोलाक्षे सुरतगुरावपत्रपिष्णोः Śi.8.46. ˚ताण्डवम् vigorous sexual movements; अद्यापि तां सुरतताण्डवसूत्रधारीं (स्मरामि) Bil. Ch. Uttara.28. ˚ताली

1 a female messenger, a go-between.

-2 a chaplet, garland for the head. ˚प्रसंगः addiction to amorous pleasures; कालक्रमेणाथ योः प्रवृत्ते स्वरूपयोग्ये सुरत- प्रसंगे Ku.1.19.

-रतिः f. great enjoyment or satis- faction.

-रस a. well-flavoured, juicy, savoury.

-2 sweet.

-3 elegant (as a composition). (

-सः, -सा) the plant सिन्धुवार. (

-सा) N. of Durgā. (

-सा, -सम्) the sacred basil.

(-सम्) 1 gum-myrrh.

-2 fragrant grass.

-राजन् a. governed by a good king; सुराज्ञि देशे राजन्वान् Ak. (-m.)

1 a good king.

-2 a divinity.

-राजिका a small house-lizard.

-राष्ट्रम् N. of a country on the western side of India (Surat). ˚जम् a kind of poison.

-2 a sort of black bean (Mar. तूर). ˚ब्रह्मः a Brāhmaṇa of Surāṣṭra.

-रूप a.

1 well-formed, handsome, love- ly; सुरूपा कन्या.

-2 wise, learned. (

-पः) an epithet of Śiva.

-रूहकः a horse resembling an ass.

-रेतस् n. mental power (चिच्छक्ति); सुरेतसादः पुनराविश्य चष्टे Bhāg. 5.7.14.

-रेभ a. fine-voiced; स्यन्दना नो चतुरगाः सुपेभा वाविपत्तयः । स्यन्दना नो च तुरगाः सुरेभा वा विपत्तयः ॥ Ki.15.16. (

-भम्) tin.

-लक्षण a.

1 having auspicious or beautiful marks.

-2 fortunate.

(-णम्) 1 observing, examining carefully, determining, ascertaining.

-2 a good or auspicious mark.

-लक्षित a. well determined or ascertained; तुलामानं प्रतीमानं सर्वं च स्यात् सुलक्षितम् Ms.8.43.

-लग्नः, -ग्नम् an auspicious moment.

-लभ a.

1 easy to be obtained, easy of attainment, attainable, feasible; न सुलभा सकलेन्दुमुखी च सा V.2.9; इदमसुलभवस्तुप्रार्थनादुर्नि- वारम् 2.6.

-2 ready for, adapted to, fit, suitable; निष्ठ्यूतश्चरणोपभोगसुलभो लाक्षारसः केनचित् Ś.4.4.

-3 natural to, proper for; मानुषतासुलभो लघिमा K. ˚कोप a. easily provoked, irascible.

-लिखित a. well registered.

-लुलित a.

1 moving playfully.

-2 greatly hurt, injured.

-लोचन a. fine-eyed. (

-नः) a deer.

(-ना) 1 a beauti- ful woman.

-2 N. of the wife of Indrajit.

-लोहकम् brass.

-लोहित a. very red. (

-ता) one of the seven tongues of fire.

-वक्त्रम् 1 a good face or mouth.

-2 correct utterance. (

-क्त्रः) N. of Śiva.

-वचनम्, -वचस् n. eloquence. -a. eloquent.

-वयस् f. a hermaphrodite.

-वर्चकः, -वर्चिकः, -का, -वर्चिन् m. natron, alkali.

-वर्चला 1 N. of the wife of the sun; तं चाहमनुवर्तिष्ये यथा सूर्यं सुवर्चला Rām.2.3.3.

-2 linseed.

-वर्चसः N. of Śiva.

-वर्चस्क a. splendid, brilliant.

-वर्ण see s. v.

-वर्तित 1 well rounded.

-2 well arranged.

-वर्तुलः a water-melon.

-वसन्तः 1 an agreeable vernal season.

-2 the day of full moon in the month of Chaitra, or a festival celebrated in honour of Kāmadeva in that month (also सुवसन्तकः in this sense).

-वह a.

1 bearing well, patient.

-2 patient, enduring.

-3 easy to be borne-

(-हा) 1 a lute.

-2 N. of several plants like रास्ना, निर्गुण्डी &c.; Mātaṅga L.1.1.

-वासः 1 N. of Śiva.

-2 a pleasant dwelling.

-3 an agreeable perfume or odo- ur.

-वासकः a water-melon.

-वासरा cress.

-वासिनी 1 a woman married or single who resides in her father's house.

-2 a married woman whose husband is alive.

-विक्रान्त a. very valiant or bold, chivalrous; सुविक्रान्तस्य नृपतेः सर्वमेव महीतलम् Śiva. B.16.45. (

-न्तः) a hero. (

-न्तम्) heroism.

-विग्रह a. having a beautiful figure.

-विचक्षण a. very clever, wise.

-विद् m. a learned man, shrewd person. (-f.) a shrewd or clever woman.

-विदः 1 an attendant on the women's apartments.

-2 a king.

-विदग्ध a. very cunning, astute.

-विदत् m. a king

-विदत्रम् 1 a household, family.

-2 wealth.

-3 grace, favour.

-विदल्लः an attendant on the women's apart- ments (wrongly for सौविदल्ल q. v.). (

-ल्लम्) the wo- men's apartments, harem.

-विदल्ला a married woman.

-विध a. of a good kind.

-विधम् ind. easily.

-विधिः a good rule, ordinance.

-विनीत a.

1 well trained, modest.

-2 well executed. (

-ता) a tractable cow.

-विनेय a. easy to be trained or educated.

-विभक्त a. well pro- portioned, symmetrical.

-विरूढ a.

1 fully grown up or developed.

-2 well ridden.

-विविक्त a.

1 solitary (as a wood).

-2 well decided (as a question).

-विहित a.

1 well-placed, well-deposited.

-2 well-furnished, well- supplied, well-provided, well-arranged; सुविहितप्रयोगतया आर्यस्य न किमपि परिहास्यते Ś.1; कलहंसमकरन्दप्रेवशावसरे तत् सुविहितम् Māl.1.

-3 well done or performed.

-4 well satisfied (by hospitality); अन्नपानैः सुविहितास्तस्मिन् यज्ञे महात्मनः Rām.1.14.16.

-वी(बी)ज a. having good seed.

(-जः) 1 N. of Śiva.

-2 the poppy. (

-जम्) good seed.

-वीरकम् 1 a kind of collyrium.

-2 sour gruel (काञ्जिक); सुवीरकं याच्यमाना मद्रिका कर्षति स्फिचौ Mb.8.4.38.

-वीराम्लम् sour rice-gruel.

-वीर्य a.

1 having great vigour.

-2 of heroic strength, heroic, chivalrous.

(-र्यम्) 1 great heroism

-2 abundance of heroes.

-3 the fruit of the jujube. (

-र्या) wild cotton.

-वृक्तिः f.

1 a pure offering.

-2 a hymn of praise.

-वृत्त a.

1 well-behaved, virtuous, good; मयि तस्य सुवृत्त वर्तते लघुसंदेशपदा सरस्वती R. 8.77.

-2 well-rounded, beautifully globular or round; मृदुनातिसुवृत्तेन सुमृष्टेनातिहारिणा । मोदकेनापि किं तेन निष्पत्तिर्यस्य सेवया ॥ or सुमुखो$पि सुवृत्तो$पि सन्मार्गपतितो$पि च । महतां पादलग्नो$पि व्यथयत्येव कष्टकः ॥ (where all the adjectives are used in a double sense). (

-त्तम्) a good or virtuous conduct; भर्तुश्चिन्तानुवर्तित्वं सुवृत्तं चानुजीविनाम् Pt.1.69. (

-त्ता) a sort of grape.

-वेल a.

1 tranquil, still.

-2 humble, quiet. (

-लः) N. of the Trikūṭa mountain.

-व्रत a. strict in the observance of religious vows, strictly virtuous or religious. (

-तः) a religious student.

(-ता) 1 a virtuous wife.

-2 a tractable cow, one easily milked.

-शंस a. well spoken of, famous, glorious, commendable.

-शक a. capable of being easily done.

-शर्मन् (m., f.) a person desiring intercourse (Uṇ.4. 165].

-शल्यः the Khadira tree.

-शाकम् undried ginger.

-शारदः N. of Śiva.

-शासित a. kept under control, well-controlled.

-शिक्षित a. well-taught, trained, well- disciplined.

-शिखः fire.

(-खा) 1 a peacock's crest.

-2 a cock's comb.

-शीतम् yellow sandal-wood.

-शीम a. cold, frigid. (

-मः) coldness

-शील a. good-tempered, amiable.

(-ला) 1 N. of the wife of Yama.

-2 N. of one of the eight favourite wives of Kriṣṇa.

-शेव a. full of happiness; pleasant to be resorted; एष पन्था उरुगायः मुशेवः Ait. Br.7.13.11.

-शोण a. dark-red.

-श्रीका the gum olibanum tree.

-श्रुत a.

1 well heard.

-2 versed in the Vedas.

-3 gladly heard (also an ex- clamation at a श्राद्ध); पित्रे स्वदितमित्येव वाच्यं गोष्ठे तु सुश्रुतम् Ms.3.254. (

-तः) N. of the author of a system of medicine, whose work, together with that of Charaka, is regardad as the oldest medical authority, and held in great esteem in India even to this day.

-श्लिष्ट a.

1 well-arranged or united.

-2 well-fitted; Māl.1.

-श्लेषः close union or embrace.

-श्लोक्य a. very famous; तेजीयसामपि ह्येतन्न सुश्लोक्यं जगद्गुरो Bhāg.3.12.31.

-संवीत a.

1 well-girt; स ददर्श ततः श्रीमान् सुग्रीवं हेमपिङ्गलम् । सुसंवीतम्... Rām.4.16.15.

-2 well dressed.

-संवृतिः good concealment. a. well-concealed; परितप्तो$प्यपरः सुसंवृतिः Śi.16.23.

-संस्कृत a.

1 well cooked or prepared.

-2 kept in good order; सुसंस्कृतोपस्करया व्यये चामुक्तहस्तया Ms.5.15.

-संगृहीत a.

1 well controlled or governed; सुसंगृहीतराष्ट्रो हि पार्थिवः सुखमेधते Ms.7.113.

-2 well received.

-3 well kept.

-4 well abridged.

-संध a. true to a promise.

-संनत a. well-directed (as an arrow).

-सत्या N. of the wife of Janaka.

-सदृश् a. agreeable to look at.

-समाहित a.

1 well arranged, beautifully adorned; very beautiful; ऋतुकालं प्रतीक्षन्ते नार्थिनः सुसमाहिते । संगमं त्वहमिच्छामि त्वया सह सुमध्यमे ॥ Rām.1.48.18.

-2 completely loaded; तद्यथानः सुसमा- हितमुत्सर्जद्यायात् Bṛi. Up.4.3.35.

-3 Very intent, attentive.

-समीहित a. much desired.

- सरण N. of Śiva.

-सह a.

1 easy to be borne.

-2 bearing or enduring well. (

-हः) an epithet of Śiva.

-सहाय a. having a good companion; प्रणेतुं शक्यते दण्डः सुसहायेन धीमता Ms.7.31.

-साधित a. well trained or educated.

-सार a. having good sap or essence.

(-रः) 1 good sap, essence, or substance.

-2 competence.

-3 the red-flowering Kha- dira tree.

-सारवत् n. crystal.

-सिकता 1 good sand.

-2 gravel.

-3 sugar.

-सुरप्रिया jasmine.

-सेव्य a. to be well or easily followed (as a road).

-सौभगम् con- jugal felicity.

-स्थ a.

1 well-suited, being in a good sense.

-2 in health, healthy, faring well.

-3 in good or prosperous circumstances, prosperous.

-4 happy, fortunate. (

-स्थम्) a happy state, well-being; प्रह्लाद सुस्थरूपोसि पश्यन् व्यसनमात्मनः Mb.12.222.12; सुस्थे को वा न पण्डितः H.3.114.

-स्थित a. in the same sense as सुस्थ. (

-तम्) a house with a gallery on all sides.

-स्थितिः (also सुस्थता) f.

1 good condition, well-being, welfare, happiness.

-2 health, convalescence.

-स्थिर a.

1 stable.

-2 resolute, cool.

-स्नातः 1 one who bathes at the end of a sacrifice; L. D. B.

-2 well purified by bathing.

-स्मित a. pleasantly smiling. (

-ता) a woman with a pleased or smiling countenance.

-स्वपनः an epithet of Śiva.

-स्वर a.

1 melodious, harmonious.

-2 loud. ˚यन्त्रकम् a kind of musical instrument; युता सुस्वरयन्त्रकैः Śukra.1.247.

-हित a.

1 very fit or suitable, appro- priate.

-2 beneficial, salutary.

-3 friendly, affection- ate.

-4 satisfied; सहस्रनेत्रः सुहितत्वमाप न Rām. ch.2.64. (

-ता) one of the seven tongues of fire.

-हृद् a. having a kind heart, cordial, friendly, loving, affectionate; सुहृदः सुहृदो$न्यांश्च दुर्हृदश्चापि दुर्हृदः । सम्यक्प्रवृत्तान् पुरुषान्नसम्यगनुपश्यतः ॥ Mb.3.28.36. (-m.)

1 a friend; सुहृदः पश्य वसन्त किं स्थितम् Ku.4.27; मन्दायन्ते न खलु सुहृदामभ्युपेतार्थकृत्याः Me.4.

-2 an ally. ˚भेदः

1 the separation of friends.

-2 N. of the 2nd book of the हितोपदेश; मित्रलाभः सुहृद्भेदो विग्रहः संधिरेव च । पञ्चतन्त्रात्तथान्यस्माद् ग्रन्थादाकृष्य लिख्यते ॥ H. Pr.9. ˚वाक्यम् the counsel of a friend.

-हृदः a friend.

-हृदय a.

1 good-hearted.

-2 dear, affectionate, loving.

Sanskrit-English dictionary > सु _su
15 -GI

(or -ki after t or s), a particle suffixed to nouns and adverbs.

A. In a positive sense [Lat. - que], ever, Lat. -que, -cunque:

1. with the pronoun hverr ( quis) through all cases, answering to the Lat. quis-que: out of the Laws we can nearly make a full paradigm:—nom. hverr-gi or hver-gi, Lat. quis-que, qui-cunque, Grág. Kb. i. 14, 31, 45, 85, 171 (twice), 183, 195, 221, ii. 7, 23, 82, 101: nom. and acc. neut. hvat-ki ( quod-que). i. 34, 155, 162, 183, 244, ii. 77, 140, 154, Jómsv. 15, Íb. 3; also hvárt-ki, id., Grág. Kb. i. 61 (twice): gen. hvers-kis (cujus-que), 238: dat. hverjun-gi (cui-que), 31, 156: acc. masc. hvern-gi (quem-que), 147, 155, 221, 225, 245, ii. 47, 66: abl. hve-gi or hví-gi, however, i. 147, 195, ii. 64, 101, 128, 151, Jómsv. 14:—plur. acc. neut. hver-gi (quae-que): dual dat. sing. hvárun-gi megin, on both sides (of a river), Grág. Kb. ii. 93:—even in historical prose, því at hit næsta sumar gat hvergi ber á Íslandi, the following summer every man gathered berries in Iceland (to make some kind of wine), Bs. i. 135, (or are we to read hvar-gi, everywhere?).

2. with adverbs; hvert-ki (quocun-que modo), Grág. ii. 50; nær-gi, whenever ( ubi-cunque), i. 191; hvar-gi, wherever, 25, 166, 240, ii. 128, 212.

B. In a negative sense, with a few pronouns, adjectives, adverbs, and rarely in old poems with substantives:

1. with nouns, in the pr. name Lopt-ki, an απ. λεγ., Ls. 19: with appellatives, þörf-gi, no need, an απ. λεγ., Hkv. Hjörv. 39; freq. in mann-gi, no man, cp. Lat. nēmo, Íb., which is even used in mod. writers and poets; væt-ki, naught; vettu-gi (dat.) and vetter-gis (gen.), Vsp.: with adjectives, ein-gi (q. v.), none, a common word; otherwise rare, sjálf-gi, ‘self-not,’ i. e. not oneself, Ls. 29, an απ. λεγ.: with a dat. case of langr, þá löngu-gi, then not for a long time, Konr. (MS.): with pronouns, in the dual, hvárr-gi, neither, Lat. neuter, Grág. Kb. i. 46, ii. 93, 151; gen. hvárs-kis ( neutrius), freq.; dat. hvárun-gi ( neutri), i. 215; hvárum-gi, ii. 63: neut. hváru-gi, 216; hitt-ki, ne illud quidem, Hm. 21, 23; þat-ki, Hbl. 6; þat-ki at ek fá ( not even that I get) mála minn falslausan, Mork. 83.

2. with adverbs, only in poetry or laws or very old prose; svá-gi, not so, Grág. Kb. ii. 99, Mork. 83; þá-gi, then not; þey-gi, though not, qs. þó-gi; æva-gi, never: again, hver-gi (q. v.), nowhere; ei-gi (q. v.), not; aldri-gi (q. v.), never; hvár-ki (q. v.), neither, are common words in prose and in speech. The negative -gi can never be suffixed to verbs (vide ‘-at,’ p. 2); therefore býð-gi, non jubeo (in Íslands-vaka 61, a poem of the last century, Fél. i. 236), is a spurious imitation of the old idiom; neither can -at be put to nouns; ráð-at hann kunni, Jónas 105, ought therefore to be ráð hann kunni-t, issue be knew not.

C. In an indefinite sense; in a few instances -gi seems to be used almost like Latin quidem with a preceding negative: eigi miklo-gi minna, ne multo quidem minus, Heiðar. S., Ísl. ii. 360; eigi stóru-gi meiri, ne multo quidem majora, 386; engi miklo-gi görr …, nemo multo quidem plus …, Grág. i. 209; cp. also the adverbs öllun-gis or öldun-gis, quite, altogether (allr, -gi); einun-gis, only, solely (einn, -gi). both formed from dat. sing.: the obsolete vil-gi (qs. vel-gi) is ambiguous, being used both in a neg. sense = not well, and posit. = well, bene quidem, cp. Bs. i. 393, note; Hm. 66, málun-gi, is doubtful;—prob. þyrftig-at málun-gi mat should be read, -at being taken not as a prep. but as a negative verbal suffix, and -gi as a positive suffix; Icel. now say, hann á ekki málungi matar, he does not know where to look for his next meal.

☞ The negative -gi is peculiar to Scandin., and no traces of it are found in any Saxon nor German idioms; whereas, as a positive suffix, it is common to all Teutonic tongues, and remains in the Engl. many and any; ‘many’ being qs. man-y = man-ever, ‘homo-cunque,’ Goth. manags, and ‘any’ qs. ane-y = every-one; so also is the g in Icel. margr and hvárigr, which are remnants—the former of the positive, the latter of the negative -gi.

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > -GI
16 आ _ā

1
आ The second letter of the Alphabet.

2

आ 1 Used as a particle or interjection showing (a) assent; 'yes', 'verily'. (b) Compassion (अनुकम्पा) 'Ah'. (c) Pain or regret (usually written आस् or अः q. v.), 'alas'. (d) Recollection (स्मरण). 'Ah', 'Oh'; आ एवं किलासीत् U.6. (e) But (used as a disjunctive conjunction). (f) And (used as a cumulative conjunction). (g) Sometimes used as an expletive; आ एवं मन्यसे. In all these senses आ is treated as a Pragṛihya vowel (does not form any Sandhi with a following vowel) P.I.1.14. (h) It shows 'anger' also.

-2 (As a prefix to verbs and nouns.) (a) it expresses the senses of near, near to, towards, from all sides, all around (see the several verbs). (b) With verbs of motion, taking, carrying &c. it shows the reverse of the action; as गम् to go, आगम् to come; दा to give, आदा to take; नी to carry, आनी to bring.

-3 (As a separable preposition with abl.) it shows either (a) the limit inceptive (अभिविधि), from, ever since, away from, out of, off, from among; आ मूलात् श्रोतुमिच्छामि Ś.1; बहुभ्य आ from out of many; आ जन्मनः Ś.5.25 ever since (her) birth; आ मनोः U.6.18. (b) Or, it expresses the limit exclusive or conclusive (मर्यादा), till, until, upto, as far as, unto; आङ् मर्यादाभिविध्योः P.II.1.13; see अभि- विधि; आ परितोषाद्विदुषाम् Ś.1.2 till the learned are satisfied; आ कैलासात् Me.11 upto or as far as Kailāsa; ओदकान्तात् Ś.4; U.1.37; V.2.2. In this sense आ sometimes governs the acc.; शतमा जातीः upto a hundred births. (c) In both these senses आ frequently enters into compound, forming either Avyayībhāva comp. or compound adjectives; आबालं (or आ बालेभ्यः) हरिभक्तिः commencing with or including children; आमुक्ति (or आ मुक्तेः) संसारः Sk. till final emancipation; आमेखलम् Ku. 1.5 as far as; आमरणम् Pt.1 till death; आगोपालं ननृतुः K.7 down to the cowherd; आगोपाला द्विजातयः including the cowherds. Sometimes the compound so formed stands as the first member of other compounds, सो$- हमाजन्मशुद्धानामाफलोदयकर्मणाम् । आसमुद्रक्षितीशानामानाकरथवर्त्मनाम् R.1.5; आगण्डविलम्बि Ś.6.17; आकर्णलम्बि M.5.1. (d) Used with loc. it has the sense of 'in', 'at' (mostly Ved.); गावो न यवसेष्वा Rv.1.91.13.

-4 With adjectives (or sometimes with nouns) आ has a diminutive force; आपञ्जर a. Little red, reddish; आपिञ्जरा बद्धरजःकणत्वान्मञ्ज- र्युदारा शुशुभे$र्जुनस्य R.16.51; आपाण्डुर a little white, whitish; आलक्ष्य Ś.7.18. slightly visible; आकम्पः gentle shaking; so आनील, आरक्त.

-5 (As a separable adverb) आ chiefly occurs in the Vedas and means near, near to, or towards, there to, further; and also, even; in many cases it emphasizes the word which precedes it, and when placed after prepositions it strengthens their sense. आ प्रगृह्ये स्मृतौ वाक्ये परितापे पितामहे । घटे भावे च आ$स्तु स्यादव्ययं कोपपीडयोः । आङीषदर्थे$भिव्याप्तौ सीमार्थे धातु- योगजे ॥ Nm.

Sanskrit-English dictionary > आ _ā
17 parum

părum, subst. indecl. and adv. (for the comp. and sup. mĭnus and mĭnĭme are used; v. h. vv. sub parvus) [akin to parvus and pauros: cf. parco], too little, not enough (opp. satis and nimium).
I.
Lit.
A.
Subst.
1.
With gen.:
in hac enim satis erat copiae, in illā autem leporis parum,
Cic. Brut. 68, 240:
non parum humanitatis (= satis),
id. Rosc. Com. 16, 46:
satis eloquentiae, sapientiae parum,
Sall. C. 5, 4:
Latini sanguinis,
Hor. Epod. 7, 4:
splendoris,
id. Ep. 2, 2, 111.—
2.
Absol.:
magis offendit nimium quam parum,
Cic. Or. 22, 73; cf.:
in hoc genere nimium quod est offendit vementius quam id, quod videtur parum,
id. ib. 53, 178:
melius est parum cum timore Domini,
Vulg. Prov. 15, 16; 16, 8.—
B.
Adverb.
1.
With verbs:
parum praedicas,
Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 218:
consulitis parum,
Ter. Ad. 5, 9, 36:
parum procedit quod ago,
id. And. 4, 1, 56:
si parum intellexti,
Plaut. Rud. 4, 4, 59:
quaero ex te, quae parum accepi,
Cic. N. D. 3, 1, 4:
cum parum memineris, quod concesseris,
id. Inv. 1, 47, 88:
credere alicui,
Caes. B. C. 2, 31:
affirmatur,
Tac. H. 4, 60.—
b.
Parum est, videtur, etc., it is, seems, not enough, not sufficient: parum habere, to deem it not enough, to be not content with any thing:
immo duas dabo, una si parum est,
Plaut. Stich. 4, 1, 44:
rebus servandis centuplex murus parum'st,
id. Pers. 4, 4, 11:
parumne est, quod nobis succenset senex, Ni instigemus etiam?
Ter. Phorm. 3, 3, 13:
parumne est, quod tantum homines fefellisti, ut neglegeres auctoritatem senatūs,
Cic. Sest. 14, 32; often followed by nisi:
consules parum sībi videri praefati pro merito eorum suā voce conlaudari eos, nisi, etc.,
Liv. 27, 10, 5:
parum fuisse non laudari Africanum... nisi, etc.,
id. 38, 54, 9; 6, 40, 8; 42, 4, 6;
38, 54, 9: parum est, ut in curiam venias, nisi, etc.,
Plin. Pan. 60; rarely by si:
parum est, si in partem ejus venis, etc.,
Liv. 6, 40, 18:
ceu parum sit in tantam pervenire altitudinem,
Plin. 31, 1, 1: non nocuisse parum est;
prodest quoque,
Ov. F. 2, 415:
quid satis est, si Roma parum?
Luc. 5, 274:
haec talia facinora impune suscepisse parum habuere,
Sall. J. 31, 9: templum violare parum habuisse, nisi, etc., Liv. 42, 3; Vell. 2, 76 fin. parum est, aegrum non esse, Tac. Or. 23.—
2.
With adjectives, not sufficiently, too little. sunt ea quidem parum firma, Cic. Att. 10, 11:
si parum multi sunt, qui, etc.,
id. Planc. 7, 18:
parum multae necessitudines,
id. ib. 30, 72; id. Tusc. 5, 37, 107:
blanda es parum,
Plaut. Cas. 3, 3, 21: dum pudet te parum optimatem esse, Cael. ap. Cic. Att. 10, 9, A, 2:
parum claris lucem dare coget,
Hor. A. P. 448:
castis,
id. C. 1, 12, 59.—
3.
With adverbs:
nemo parum diu vixit, qui, etc.,
not enough, not sufficiently, Cic. Tusc. 1, 45, 109:
diligenter,
id. Att. 10, 9:
mature,
Liv. 21, 3:
cui rei parum diligenter ab iis erat provisum,
Caes. B. G. 3, 18, 6:
si quando dictum est: est autem dictum non parum saepe,
often enough, Cic. Fin. 2, 4, 12:
cum non parum liberaliter domum suam homines invitaret,
Nep. Att. 13, 6; cf.:
parum in tempore,
not in good season, too late, Tac. A. 1, 19.—
II.
Transf., in gen., not particularly, not very, little (perh. only postAug.), v. Madv. ad Cic. Fin. 781 sq.; Dietsch ad Sall. J. 85, 31.
A.
With adjectives:
semper fuerunt non parum multi, qui, etc.,
not few, Quint. 6, 2, 3; so,
scripsit non parum multa,
id. 10, 1, 124.—
B.
With verbs:
non sunt composita mea verba: parum id facio,
I care little for it, Sall. J. 85, 31 Kritz (but the true read. is parvi, Dietsch ad loc.; Madv. ad Cic. Fin. p. 781):
dolebimus, sed parum,
Sen. Ep. 116, 7:
nihil aut certe parum, intererat,
Plin. Pan. 20, 3:
(littera M) etiamsi scribitur, tamen parum exprimitur,
it is hardly sounded, Quint. 9, 4, 40; 8, 3, 5:
possessa ipso transitu Vicetia: quod per se parum, etc.,
Tac. H. 3, 8:
non principatus appetens, parum effugerat ne dignus crederetur (= vix),
id. ib. 3, 39 fin. (Cic. Tusc. 5, 14, 41, the better read. is: qui pauca metuit, Bait.).

Lewis & Short latin dictionary > parum
18 μάλα

μάλα, comp. μᾶλλον, sup. μάλιστα: (1) positive, μάλα, very, quite, right, modifying adjectives and other adverbs, and sometimes placed after its word, ἦρι μάλ, Il. 9.360; occasionally with substantives, μάλα χρεώ, Ι 1, Od. 18.370; also with verbs ( μάλα πολεμίζειν, ‘with might and main’), and esp. to strengthen an assertion as a whole, certainly, verily, Il. 3.204. μάλα admits of much variety in translating in connection with its several usages.— (2) comp., μᾶλλον, more, all the more, Od. 5.284; ‘more willingly,’ ‘more gladly,’ Il. 5.231, Od. 1.351.— (3) sup., μάλιστα, most, especially, far, by far, with adjectives forming a superlative, Il. 6.433; and even with superlatives themselves, Il. 2.57 f., Il. 24.334.

A Homeric dictionary (Greek-English) (Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά ομηρικό λεξικό) > μάλα
19 such

[sʌtʃ] 1.
pronome (this)

such is life — così è la vita

she's a good singer and recognized as such — è una brava cantante ed è riconosciuta come tale

religion as such — la religione in quanto tale
2.
determinante

1) (of kind previously mentioned) (replicated) tale; (similar) così, simile; (of similar sort) di questo tipo

such a situation — una situazione tale

such individuals — tipi così

in such a situation — in una situazione come questa

at such a time — in un momento simile

and other such arguments — e altri argomenti così o di questo tipo

doctors, dentists and all such people — dottori, dentisti e gente del genere

a mouse or some such animal — un topo o un animale simile o così

there was some such case last year — c'è stato un caso simile l'anno scorso

you'll do no such thing! — non sognarti di fare una cosa simile!

2) (of specific kind)

to be such that — essere tale che

his movements were such as to arouse suspicion — i suoi spostamenti erano tali da fare sorgere dei o destare sospetti

in such a way that — in modo tale da

3) (any possible)

such money as I have — quei pochi soldi che ho

until such time as — fino a quando o al momento in cui

4) (so great) tale

such was his admiration that — la sua ammirazione era tale che
3.
avverbio

1) (to a great degree) (with adjectives) così, talmente; (with nouns) tale

such a nice boy! — un ragazzo così simpatico!

such good quality as this — di qualità (buona) come questa

it was such (a lot of) fun — è stato così divertente

such a lot of problems — (così) tanti problemi

(ever) such a lot of people — (così) tanta gente

2) such as come, tale che

such a house as this, a house such as this — una casa come questa

a person such as her — una persona come lei

such as? — (as response) per esempio?

there are no such things as giants — i giganti non esistono

have you such a thing as a screwdriver? — hai per caso un cacciavite?

* * *
1. adjective
1) (of the same kind as that already mentioned or being mentioned: Animals that gnaw, such as mice, rats, rabbits and weasels are called rodents; He came from Bradford or some such place; She asked to see Mr Johnson but was told there was no such person there; I've seen several such buildings; I've never done such a thing before; doctors, dentists and such people.) come, simile, tale

2) (of the great degree already mentioned or being mentioned: If you had telephoned her, she wouldn't have got into such a state of anxiety; She never used to get such bad headaches (as she does now).) tale, così

3) (of the great degree, or the kind, to have a particular result: He shut the window with such force that the glass broke; She's such a good teacher that the headmaster asked her not to leave; Their problems are such as to make it impossible for them to live together any more.) tale, così

4) (used for emphasis: This is such a shock! They have been such good friends to me!) tale, così
2. pronoun
(such a person or thing, or such persons or things: I have only a few photographs, but can show you such as I have; This isn't a good book as such (= as a book) but it has interesting pictures.) questo, tale

- suchlike
- such-and-such
- such as it is
* * *
[sʌtʃ] 1.
pronome (this)

such is life — così è la vita

she's a good singer and recognized as such — è una brava cantante ed è riconosciuta come tale

religion as such — la religione in quanto tale
2.
determinante

1) (of kind previously mentioned) (replicated) tale; (similar) così, simile; (of similar sort) di questo tipo

such a situation — una situazione tale

such individuals — tipi così

in such a situation — in una situazione come questa

at such a time — in un momento simile

and other such arguments — e altri argomenti così o di questo tipo

doctors, dentists and all such people — dottori, dentisti e gente del genere

a mouse or some such animal — un topo o un animale simile o così

there was some such case last year — c'è stato un caso simile l'anno scorso

you'll do no such thing! — non sognarti di fare una cosa simile!

2) (of specific kind)

to be such that — essere tale che

his movements were such as to arouse suspicion — i suoi spostamenti erano tali da fare sorgere dei o destare sospetti

in such a way that — in modo tale da

3) (any possible)

such money as I have — quei pochi soldi che ho

until such time as — fino a quando o al momento in cui

4) (so great) tale

such was his admiration that — la sua ammirazione era tale che
3.
avverbio

1) (to a great degree) (with adjectives) così, talmente; (with nouns) tale

such a nice boy! — un ragazzo così simpatico!

such good quality as this — di qualità (buona) come questa

it was such (a lot of) fun — è stato così divertente

such a lot of problems — (così) tanti problemi

(ever) such a lot of people — (così) tanta gente

2) such as come, tale che

such a house as this, a house such as this — una casa come questa

a person such as her — una persona come lei

such as? — (as response) per esempio?

there are no such things as giants — i giganti non esistono

have you such a thing as a screwdriver? — hai per caso un cacciavite?

English-Italian dictionary > such
20 whether

['weðə(r)] [AE 'hweðər]
congiunzione

1) (if) se

I wasn't sure whether to answer or not o whether or not to answer non sapevo se rispondere o no; I wonder whether it's true mi chiedo se sia vero; the question is whether anyone is interested il problema è capire se c'è qualcuno interessato; he was worried about whether to invite her — si chiedeva se era il caso di invitarla

2) (no matter if)

you're going to school whether you like it or not! — a scuola ci vai, che ti piaccia o no!

whether or not you are happy is of little importance — se sei contento o no ha poca importanza

he needs an adult whether it be a parent or teacher — ha bisogno di un adulto, non importa se è un genitore o un insegnante
••
Note:

When whether is used to mean if, it is translated by se: I wonder whether she got my letter = mi chiedo se ha (or: abbia) ricevuto la mia lettera. See 1 in the entry below. - Although if can also be used, whether often occurs after verbs such as doubt, know, see and wonder, with adjectives such as doubtful and sure, and with nouns like doubt and question. You can find further examples at these entries. - In whether...or not sentences, whether is translated by che and the verb that follows is in the subjunctive: whether you agree or not = che tu sia d'accordo o no, whether you like it or not = che ti piaccia o no; note, however, that whether + infinitive is translated by se + infinitive in Italian: I have to decide whether or not to accept his proposal = devo decidere se accettare la sua proposta o no. See 2 in the entry below

* * *
['weðə]
conjunction

(if: I don't know whether it's possible.) se

- whether... or

* * *
['weðə(r)] [AE 'hweðər]
congiunzione

1) (if) se

I wasn't sure whether to answer or not o whether or not to answer non sapevo se rispondere o no; I wonder whether it's true mi chiedo se sia vero; the question is whether anyone is interested il problema è capire se c'è qualcuno interessato; he was worried about whether to invite her — si chiedeva se era il caso di invitarla

2) (no matter if)

you're going to school whether you like it or not! — a scuola ci vai, che ti piaccia o no!

whether or not you are happy is of little importance — se sei contento o no ha poca importanza

he needs an adult whether it be a parent or teacher — ha bisogno di un adulto, non importa se è un genitore o un insegnante
••
Note:

When whether is used to mean if, it is translated by se: I wonder whether she got my letter = mi chiedo se ha (or: abbia) ricevuto la mia lettera. See 1 in the entry below. - Although if can also be used, whether often occurs after verbs such as doubt, know, see and wonder, with adjectives such as doubtful and sure, and with nouns like doubt and question. You can find further examples at these entries. - In whether...or not sentences, whether is translated by che and the verb that follows is in the subjunctive: whether you agree or not = che tu sia d'accordo o no, whether you like it or not = che ti piaccia o no; note, however, that whether + infinitive is translated by se + infinitive in Italian: I have to decide whether or not to accept his proposal = devo decidere se accettare la sua proposta o no. See 2 in the entry below

English-Italian dictionary > whether

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

Adjectives — ◊ GRAMMAR An adjective is a word that is used to describe someone or something or give information about them. ◊ form The form of an adjective does not change: the same form is used for singular and plural, for subject and object, and for male… … Useful english dictionary
adjectives — ◊ GRAMMAR An adjective is a word that is used to describe someone or something or give information about them. ◊ form The form of an adjective does not change: the same form is used for singular and plural, for subject and object, and for male… … Useful english dictionary
-er and -est forms of adjectives and adverbs — 1. general. This article deals with the forms of the comparative and superlative of adjectives and adverbs, either by inflection (larger, largest; happier, happiest) or by using more and most (more usual; most unfortunately). It also deals in… … Modern English usage
Chinese adjectives — (simplified Chinese: 形容词; traditional Chinese: 形容詞; pinyin: xíngróngcí) differ from those in English in that they can be used as verbs (for example 天黑了 tiān hēi le The sky has become dark ) and thus linguists sometimes prefer to use the terms… … Wikipedia
Japanese adjectives — According to many analyses[citation needed], the Japanese language does not have words that function as adjectives in a syntactic sense, i.e. tree diagrams of Japanese sentences can be constructed without employing adjective phrases. However,… … Wikipedia
Comparative and superlative adjectives — ◊ GRAMMAR comparative adjectives Comparative adjectives are used to indicate that something has more of a quality than something else, or more than it used to have. The comparative of an adjective is formed by adding er , as in smaller , or by… … Useful english dictionary
comparative and superlative adjectives — ◊ GRAMMAR comparative adjectives Comparative adjectives are used to indicate that something has more of a quality than something else, or more than it used to have. The comparative of an adjective is formed by adding er , as in smaller , or by… … Useful english dictionary
Comparative adjectives — ◊ GRAMMAR comparative adjectives Comparative adjectives are used to indicate that something has more of a quality than something else, or more than it used to have. The comparative of an adjective is formed by adding er , as in smaller , or by… … Useful english dictionary
comparative adjectives — ◊ GRAMMAR comparative adjectives Comparative adjectives are used to indicate that something has more of a quality than something else, or more than it used to have. The comparative of an adjective is formed by adding er , as in smaller , or by… … Useful english dictionary
superlative adjectives — ◊ GRAMMAR comparative adjectives Comparative adjectives are used to indicate that something has more of a quality than something else, or more than it used to have. The comparative of an adjective is formed by adding er , as in smaller , or by… … Useful english dictionary
Gender-neutrality in languages with grammatical gender — implies promoting language usage which is balanced in its treatment of the genders. For example, advocates of gender neutral language challenge the traditional use of masculine nouns and pronouns ( man , businessman , he , and so on) when… … Wikipedia

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: со всех языков на все языки

(with adjectives)

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: со всех языков на все языки

(with adjectives)

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка: